topBook 2 previous chapterprev next chapternext

Introduction

Note: Our book was compiled from those of Clement, Tertullian, Josephus, and Philo.
Τάδεthis καὶand, also, even, then, next the β2, second περιέχειto contain, astonish, surround βίβλοςbook τῆςthe Ἐκκλησιαστικῆςecclesiastical ἱστορίαςhistory, story The contents of the second book of the History of the Church is as follows :

TABLE OF CONTENTS


Chapter 1 περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῆςthe μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τὴν‎the ἀνάληψινascension τοῦthe ΧριστοῦChrist διαγωγῆςlifestyle τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle.
On the Life of the Apostles After the Ascension of Christ.
Chapter 2 Ὅπωςwhen ΤιβέριοςTiberius ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under ΠιλάτουPilate τὰthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe ΧριστοῦChrist διδαχθεὶςto teach ἐκινήθηto move.
On the Emotion of Tiberius at Learning from Pilate the Story of Christ.
Chapter 3 Ὅπωςwhen εἰςinto, unto, for πάνταevery, all τὸνthe κόσμονworld, honour ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to βραχεῖshort, little χρόνῳtime διέδραμενto escape; to run across the; oh περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe ΧριστοῦChrist λόγοςstatement, word .
How in a Short Time the Message Concerning Christ Ran Through the Whole World.
Chapter 4 Ὡςhow, when μετὰ+G=with; +A=after ΤιβέριονTiberius ΓάϊοςGaius, Caius ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews βασιλέαking καθίστησινto appoint ἈγρίππανAgrippa , τὸνthe ἩρῴδηνHerod ἀϊδίῳeternal ζημιώσαςto condemn; to punish φυγῇflight, escape.
How After Tiberius, Caius Appointed Agrippa as King of the Jews and Punished Herod with Perpetual Banishment.
Chapter 5 Ὡςhow, when ΦίλωνPhilo ὑπὲρ+ GEN = in behalf of, instead of; + ACC = over, above, beyond ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews πρεσβείανdelegation of elders ἐστείλατοto arrange πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with ΓάϊονGaius, Caius.
How Philo Was Sent on an Embassy to Caius on Behalf of the Jews.
Chapter 6 Ὅσαas much as ἸουδαίοιςJews συνερρύηto flow together κακὰevil, bad μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τὴν‎the κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τοῦthe ΧριστοῦChrist τόλμανcourage .
All the Evils Which Accumulated on the Jews After Their Crime Against Christ.
Chapter 7 Ὡςhow, when καὶand, also, even, then, next ΠιλᾶτοςPilate ἑαυτὸνhimself, herself, itself διεχρήσατοto proclaim .
How Pilate Also Committed Suicide.
Chapter 8 περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΚλαύδιονClaudius λιμοῦfamine .
Concerning the Famine in the Time of Claudius.
Chapter 9 Μαρτύριονmartyrdom ἸακώβουJacob, James τοῦthe ἀποστόλουapostle .
The Martyrdom of James the Apostle.
Chapter 10 Ὡςhow, when ἈγρίππαςAgrippa the; oh καὶand, also, even, then, next ἩρῴδηςHerod τοὺςthe ἀποστόλουςapostle διώξαςto pursue τῆςthe θείαςdivine παραυτίκαmomentary δίκηςjustice, decision ᾔσθετοto perceive .
How Agrippa, Who Was Also Called Herod, Perecuted the Apostles and at Once Felt the Punishment of God.
Chapter 11 περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around ΘευδᾶTheudas τοῦthe γόητοςsorcerer.
On Theudas the Magician.
Chapter 12 περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around ἙλένηςHelena τῆςthe τῶνthe ἈδιαβηνῶνAdiabeni βασιλίδοςqueen, princess .
On Helena the Queen of the Adiabeni.
Chapter 13 περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around ΣίμωνοςSimon τοῦthe μὰγουwizard .
On Simon Magus.
Chapter 14 περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ῬώμηνRome κηρύγματοςproclamation ΠέτρουPeter τοῦthe ἀποστόλουapostle.
On the Preaching of Peter the Apostle at Rome.
Chapter 15 περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΜάρκονMarcus, Mark εὐαγγελίουgood news, gospel.
On the Gospel According to Mark.
Chapter 16 Ὡςhow, when πρῶτοςfirst ΜάρκοςMarcus, Mark τοῖςthe κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to ΑἴγυπτονEgypt τὴν‎the εἰςinto, unto, for τὸνthe ΧριστὸνChrist γνῶσινNoun: knowledge; Verb: to know ἐκήρυξενto proclaim, preach, announce .
How Mark Was the First to Preach the Knowledge of Christ to Those in Egypt.
Chapter 17 Οἷαwhat περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῶνthe κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to ΑἴγυπτονEgypt ἀσκητῶνa person who practices (something) the; oh ΦίλωνPhilo ἱστορεῖto inquire into; record .
The Narrative of Philo on the Ascetics in Egypt.
Chapter 18 Ὅσαas much as τοῦthe ΦίλωνοςPhilo εἰςinto, unto, for ἡμᾶςwe, us περιῆλθενto go around συγγράμματαwriting, book.
The Treatise of Philo Which Have Come Down to Us.
Chapter 19 Οἵαsuch as, what τοὺςthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἹεροσολύμοιςJerusalem ἸουδαίουςJews συμφορὰinjury, encounter μετῆλθενto go over to ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe τοῦthe πάσχαpassover ἡμέρᾳday .
The Misfortunes Which Overtook the Jews in Jerusalem on the Day of the Passover.
Chapter 20 Οἷαwhat καὶand, also, even, then, next κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΝέρωναNero ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τοῖςthe ἹεροσολύμοιςJerusalem ἐπράχθηto do.
What Was Done at Jerusalem under Nero.
Chapter 21 περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe ΑἰγυπτίουEgyptian , οὗwhere; who, which, that καὶand, also, even, then, next τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle αἱthe ΠράξειςActs ἐμνημόνευσανto remember .
On the Egyptian Whom the Acts of the Apostles Also Mentioned.
Chapter 22 Ὡςhow, when ἐκout, out of τῆςthe ἸουδαίαςJudaea εἰςinto, unto, for τὴν‎the ῬώμηνRome δέσμιοςprisoner ἀναπεμφθεὶςto send back ΠαῦλοςPaul ἀπολογησάμενοςto speak in defence, defend oneself πάσηςall, utter, complete ἀπελύθηto depart αἰτίαςcause, accusation .
How Paul Was Sent as a Prisoner to Rome from Judaea and After Defending Himself Was Acquitted of All Guilt.
Chapter 23 Ὡςhow, when ἐμαρτύρησενto testify, martyr ἸάκωβοςJames, Jacob the; oh τοῦthe κυρίουlord χρηματίσαςto negotiate, warn ἀδελφόςbrother.
How James Who Was Called the Brother of the Lord Suffered Martyrdom.
Chapter 24 Ὡςhow, when μετὰ+G=with; +A=after ΜάρκονMarcus, Mark πρῶτοςfirst ἐπίσκοποςoverseer, bishop τῆςthe ἈλεξανδρέωνAlexandria, Alexandrians ἐκκλησίαςassembly, church ἈννιανὸςAnnianus κατέστηto put in place, appoint .
How After Μark, Αnnianus Was the First to Be Appointed Bishop of the Chureh of the Alexandrians.
Chapter 25 περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΝέρωναNero διωγμοῦpersecution , καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ὃνwhom, which, that ἐπὶon, upon, against ῬώμηςRome ΠαῦλοςPaul καὶand, also, even, then, next ΠέτροςPeter τοῖςthe ὑπὲρ+ GEN = in behalf of, instead of; + ACC = over, above, beyond εὐσεβείαςgodliness, religion μαρτυρίοιςtestimony κατεκοσμήθησανto arrange .
On the Persecution under Nero in Which Ρaul and Peter at Rome Were Adorned with Martyrdom for Religion’s Sake.
Chapter 26 Ὡςhow, when μυρίοις10,000 κακοῖςbad, evil περιηλάθησανto drive around ἸουδαῖοιJews, Judea , καὶand, also, even, then, next ὡςas τὸνthe ὕστατονlast πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with ῬωμαίουςRomans ἤραντοto lift up πόλεμονbattle, strife, war . Συνῆκταιto assemble ἡμῖνus, our the βίβλοςbook ἀπὸfrom, away from τῶνthe ΚλήμεντοςClement ΤερτυλλιανοῦTertullian ἸωσήπουJosephus, Joseph ΦίλωνοςPhilo.
How the Jews Were Pursued By Countless Evils and How They Began the Final War Against the Romans.

Preliminary Introduction

[1] Ὅσαas much as μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. τῆςthe ἐκκλησιαστικῆςecclesiastical ἱστορίαςhistory, story ἐχρῆνit is fated, necessary ὡςas ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to προοιμίῳprelude, parable διαστείλασθαιto separate τῆςthe τεand, both, if θεολογίαςword of God πέρι+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe σωτηρίουsalvation, peace offering λόγουword, statement καὶand, also, even, then, next τῆςthe ἀρχαιολογίαςantiquities τῶνthe τῆςthe ἡμετέραςour διδασκαλίαςteaching, instruction δογμάτωνdecree ἀρχαιότητόςantiquity, early τεand, both, if τῆςthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΧριστιανοὺςChristians εὐαγγελικῆςgospel πολιτείαςcitizenship , οὐno, not μὴνmonth; and yet, indeed, surely ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but καὶand, also, even, then, next ὅσαall who; as great as περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῆςthe γενομένηςto become, come to be ἔναγχοςjust now, lately ἐπιφανείαςappearing, surface αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same , τάthe τεand, both, if πρὸbefore τοῦthe πάθουςsuffering καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῆςthe τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle ἐκλογῆςchosen, elect , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῷthe πρὸbefore τούτουthis , συντεμόντεςto cut down τὰςthe ἀποδείξειςproof, manifestation , διειλήφαμενto comprehend · [1] We have discussed in the preceding book those subjects in ecclesiastical history which it was necessary to treat by way of introduction, and have accompanied them with brief proofs. Such were the divinity of the saving Word, and the antiquity of the doctrines which we teach, as well as of that evangelical life which is led by Christians, together with the events which have taken place in connection with Christ’s recent appearance, and in connection with his passion and with the choice of the apostles.
[2] Φέρεto move, carry δ᾽but, and, however, now , ἐπὶon, upon, against τοῦthe παρόντοςto come here, be present ἤδηnow, already καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰthe μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τὴν‎the ἀνάληψινascension αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same διασκεψώμεθαto consider carefully , τὰthe μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ἐκout, out of τῶνthe θείωνholy παρασημαινόμενοιto counterseal γραμμάτωνletter , τὰthe δ᾽but, and, however, now ἔξωθενexternal, outward προσιστοροῦντεςto narrate besides ἐξout, out of ὧνwho, whom, which κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along καιρὸνtime, season μνημονεύσομενto remember ὑπομνημάτωνa record, memorial . [2] in the present book let us examine the events which took place after his ascension, confirming some of them from the divine Scriptures, and others from such writings as we shall refer to from time to time.

Chapter 1

1-1 Πρῶτοςfirst τοιγαροῦνtherefore εἰςinto, unto, for τὴν‎the ἀποστολὴνapostleship ἀντὶagainst, instead of τοῦthe προδότουtraitor ἸούδαJude, Judas κληροῦταιto appoint by lot ΜατθίαςMatthias, εἷςone καὶand, also, even, then, next αὐτόςhe, she, it, -self, same, ὡςas δεδήλωταιto show, explain, τῶνthe τοῦthe κυρίουlord γενόμενοςto become, come to be μαθητῶνdisciple . καθίστανταιto set down δὲbut, and, however δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of εὐχῆςprayer, vow καὶand, also, even, then, next χειρῶνhand ἐπιθέσεωςa laying on τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle εἰςinto, unto, for διακονίανservice ὑπηρεσίαςministry ἕνεκαfor sake of, because τοῦthe κοινοῦcommon ἄνδρεςman δεδοκιμασμένοιto allow, prove , τὸνthe ἀριθμὸνnumber, total ἑπτάseven , οἱthe ἀμφὶabout τὸνthe ΣτέφανονStephen. ὃςwho, which, that καὶand, also, even, then, next πρῶτοςfirst μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τὸνthe κύριονlord ἅμαat once, together, both, early τῇthe χειροτονίᾳto vote by raising the hand , ὥσπερjust as εἰςinto, unto, for αὐτὸhe, she, it, -self, same τοῦτοthis προαχθείςto go forward , λίθοιςstone εἰςinto, unto, for θάνατονdeath πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τῶνthe κυριοκτόνωνslaying a lord βάλλεταιto throw , καὶand, also, even, then, next ταύτῃthis πρῶτοςfirst τὸνthe αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same φερώνυμονbearing the name of 1 τῶνthe ἀξιονίκωνworthy of victory τοῦthe ΧριστοῦChrist μαρτύρωνwitness ἀποφέρεταιto carry away στέφανονvictor’s wreath, garland, crown . First, then, in the place of Judas, the betrayer, Matthias, who, as has been shown was also one of the Seventy, was chosen to the apostolate. And there were appointed to the diaconate, for the service of the congregation, by prayer and the laying on of the hands of the apostles, approved men, seven in number, of whom Stephen was one. He first, after the Lord, was stoned to death at the time of his ordination by the slayers of the Lord, as if he had been promoted for this very purpose. And thus he was the first to receive the crown, corresponding to his name,1which belongs to the martyrs of Christ, who are worthy of the meed of victory.
1Stephen in Greek means a victor’s wreath or crown not a royal crown.
1-2 Τότεthen δῆταindeed καὶand, also, even, then, next ἸάκωβονJames, Jacob, τὸνthe τοῦthe κυρίουlord λεγόμενονto speak, talk, say ἀδελφόνbrother , ὅτιbecause, for, that, since δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore καὶand, also, even, then, next οὗτοςthus, so, this τοῦthe ἸωσὴφJoseph ὠνόμαστοto name παῖςchild, servant , τοῦthe δὲbut, and, however ΧριστοῦChrist πατὴρfather the; oh ἸωσήφJoseph , who, which, that μνηστευθεῖσαto be betrothed the παρθένοςvirgin , πρὶνbefore, prior or, either, than; +πριν=before συνελθεῖνto come together, assemble αὐτούςhe, she, it, -self, same , εὑρέθηto find ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to γαστρὶbelly, womb ἔχουσαto have, hold ἐκout, out of πνεύματοςspirit, breath, wind ἁγίουholy , ὡςas the ἱερὰsacred things τῶνthe εὐαγγελίωνgood news διδάσκειto teach γραφήscripture · τοῦτονthis δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἸάκωβονJames, Jacob , ὃνwhom, which, that καὶand, also, even, then, next δίκαιονrighteous ἐπίκληνnamely οἱthe πάλαιformerly, long ago δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ἀρετῆςpraise, virtue ἐκάλουνto call προτερήματαvictory, success , πρῶτονfirst, before ἱστοροῦσινto record as history τῆςthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἹεροσολύμοιςJerusalem ἐκκλησίαςassembly, church Then James, whom the ancients surnamed the Just on account of the excellence of his virtue, is recorded to have been the first to be made bishop of the church of Jerusalem. This James was called the brother of the Lord because he was known as a son of Joseph, and Joseph was supposed to be the father of Christ, because the Virgin, being betrothed to him, was found with child by the Holy Ghost before they came together,1as the account of the holy Gospels shows.
1-3 τὸνthe τῆςthe ἐπισκοπῆςvisit; overseer ἐγχειρισθῆναιto entrust θρόνονthrone, seat · ΚλήμηςClement ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἕκτῳsixth τῶνthe ὙποτυπώσεωνHypotyposes γράφωνto write ὧδεhere παρίστησινto stand besideΠέτρονPeter γάρfor, because φησινto affirm, say καὶand, also, even, then, next ἸάκωβονJames, Jacob καὶand, also, even, then, next ἸωάννηνJohn μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τὴν‎the ἀνάληψινascension τοῦthe σωτῆροςsaviour , ὡςas ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever καὶand, also, even, then, next ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under τοῦthe σωτῆροςsaviour προτετιμημένουςto honour , μὴno, not ἐπιδικάζεσθαιto strive for δόξηςglory , ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but ἸάκωβονJames, Jacob τὸνthe δίκαιονrighteous ἐπίσκοπονoverseer, bishop τῶνthe ἹεροσολύμωνJerusalem ἑλέσθαιto grasp, seize . ” But Clement in the sixth book of his Hypotyposes writes thus: for they say that Peter and James and John after the ascension of our Saviour, as if also preferred by our Lord, strove not after honour, but chose James the Just bishop of Jerusalem.
1-4 the; oh δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἑβδόμῳseventh τῆςthe αὐτῆςhe, she, it, -self, same ὑποθέσεωςbasic doctrine ἔτιever, any longer, yet καὶand, also, even, then, next ταῦταthese (things) περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same φησινto affirm, sayἸακώβῳJacob, James τῷthe δικαίῳjust, righteous καὶand, also, even, then, next ἸωάννῃJohn καὶand, also, even, then, next ΠέτρῳPeter μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τὴν‎the ἀνάστασινresurrection παρέδωκενto give over, betray τὴν‎the γνῶσινNoun: knowledge; Verb: to know the; oh κύριοςlord , οὗτοιthese τοῖςthe λοιποῖςrest, remaining ἀποστόλοιςapostle παρέδωκανto give away, give over , οἱthe δὲbut, and, however λοιποὶremainder ἀπόστολοιapostles τοῖςthe ἑβδομήκονταseventy · ὧνwho, whom, which εἷςone ἦνto be καὶand, also, even, then, next ΒαρναβᾶςBarnabas . δύοboth, two, double δὲbut, and, however γεγόνασινto become, come to be ἸάκωβοιJames(p) , εἷςone the; oh δίκαιοςjust, righteous , the; oh κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τοῦthe πτερυγίουwing βληθεὶςto throw καὶand, also, even, then, next ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under γναφέωςcloth-dresser ξύλῳtree, wood πληγεὶςto strike εἰςinto, unto, for θάνατονdeath , ἕτεροςother, another, next δὲbut, and, however the; oh καρατομηθείςto behead . ” But the same writer, in the seventh book of the same work, relates also the following things concerning him: the Lord after his resurrection imparted knowledge to James the Just and to John and Peter, and they imparted it to the rest of the apostles, and the rest of the apostles to the seventy, of whom Barnabas was one. But there were two Jameses: one called the Just, who was thrown from the pinnacle of the temple and was beaten to death with a club by a fuller, and another who was beheaded.
1-5 Αὐτοῦhe, she, it, -self, same δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore τοῦthe δικαίουrighteous καὶand, also, even, then, next the; oh ΠαῦλοςPaul μνημονεύειto mention, remember γράφωνto writeἕτερονother, another, next δὲbut, and, however τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle οὐκno, not εἶδονto know, see , εἰCONJ: if, since μὴno, not ἸάκωβονJames, Jacob τὸνthe ἀδελφὸνbrother τοῦthe κυρίουlord . ” Paul also makes mention of the same James the Just, where he writes, Other of the apostles saw I none, except James the Lord’s brother.1
1-6 Ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τούτοιςthese καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰthe τῆςthe τοῦthe σωτῆροςsaviour ἡμῶνour, of us πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τὸνthe τῶνthe ὈσροηνῶνOsrhoenes βασιλέαking τέλοςend ἐλάμβανενto take, receive ὑποσχέσεωςa promise . the; oh γοῦνtherefore, hence ΘωμᾶςThomas τὸνthe ΘαδδαῖονThaddeus κινήσειto move θειοτέρᾳmore divine ἐπὶon, upon, against τὰthe ἜδεσσαEdessa κήρυκαpreacher καὶand, also, even, then, next εὐαγγελιστὴνevangelist τῆςthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe ΧριστοῦChrist διδασκαλίαςteaching, instruction ἐκπέμπειto send out , ὡςas ἀπὸfrom, away from τῆςthe εὑρεθείσηςto find αὐτόθιhere, in this place γραφῆςdocument μικρῷsmall, few πρόσθενearlier, former ἐδηλώσαμενto disclose · At that time also the promise of our Saviour to the king of the Osrhoenians was fulfilled. For Thomas, under a divine impulse, sent Thaddeus to Edessa as a preacher and evangelist of the religion of Christ, as we have shown a little above from the document found there.
1-7 the; oh δὲbut, and, however τοῖςthe τόποιςplace ἐπιστάςto set up, erect , τόνthe τεand, both, if ἌβγαρονAbgarus ἰᾶταιto heal τῷthe ΧριστοῦChrist λόγῳstatement, word, proposal καὶand, also, even, then, next τοὺςthe αὐτόθιhere, in this place πάνταςevery, all τοῖςthe τῶνthe θαυμάτωνwonder παραδόξοιςincredible ἐκπλήττειto expel , ἱκανῶςsufficiently τεand, both, if αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same τοῖςthe ἔργοιςdeed, work διαθεὶςto run to and fro; to arrange καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐπὶon, upon, against σέβαςreverential awe ἀγαγὼνto lead, bring τῆςthe τοῦthe ΧριστοῦChrist δυνάμεωςability, power , μαθητὰςdisciple τῆςthe σωτηρίουsalvation, peace offering διδασκαλίαςteaching, instruction κατεστήσατοto set down , εἰςinto, unto, for ἔτιever, any longer, yet τεand, both, if νῦνnow; mouse ἐξout, out of ἐκείνουthat the πᾶσαevery, all τῶνthe ἘδεσσηνῶνEdessenes πόλιςcity τῇthe ΧριστοῦChrist προσανάκειταιto be devoted to προσηγορίᾳname, naming ,1 οὐno, not τὸthe τυχὸνperhaps ἐπιφερομένηto bring, put upon δεῖγμαa specimen, example τῆςthe τοῦthe σωτῆροςsaviour ἡμῶνour, of us καὶand, also, even, then, next εἰςinto, unto, for αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same εὐεργεσίαςkindness, benefit . When he came to that place he healed Abgarus by the word of Christ; and after bringing all the people there into the right attitude of mind by means of his works, and leading them to adore the power of Christ, he made them disciples of the Saviour’s teaching. And from that time down to the present the whole city of the Edessenes has been devoted to the name of Christ,1offering no common proof of the beneficence of our Saviour toward them also.
1This seems merely to mean “became converted to Christianity.”
1-8 καὶand, also, even, then, next ταῦταthese (things) δ᾽but, and, however, now ὡςas ἐξout, out of ἀρχαίωνearly, ancient ἱστορίαςhistory, story εἰρήσθωto speak, talk, say· μετίωμενto be among, to go δ᾽but, and, however, now αὖθιςback again ἐπὶon, upon, against τὴν‎the θείανdivine γραφήνscripture . These things have been drawn from ancient accounts; but let us now turn again to the divine Scripture.
1-9 Γενομένουto become δῆταindeed ἐπὶon, upon, against τῇthe τοῦthe ΣτεφάνουStephen μαρτυρίᾳwitness, record πρώτουfirst, chief καὶand, also, even, then, next μεγίστουgreatest (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τῆςthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἹεροσολύμοιςJerusalem ἐκκλησίαςassembly, church διωγμοῦpersecution πάντωνevery, all τεand, both, if τῶνthe μαθητῶνdisciple πλὴνnevertheless, moreover ὅτιbecause, for, that, since μόνωνonly, alone τῶνthe δώδεκαtwelve ἀνὰby, each, respectively τὴν‎the ἸουδαίανJudaea τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next ΣαμάρειανSamaria διασπαρέντωνto scatter , τινὲςsomeone, something , who, which, that φησινto affirm, say the θείαgod, divine γραφήscripture , διελθόντεςto go through ἕωςas far as, until, up to, even as ΦοινίκηςPhoenicia καὶand, also, even, then, next ΚύπρουCyprus καὶand, also, even, then, next ἈντιοχείαςAntioch οὔπωnot yet μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ἔθνεσινgentile, nation, people οἷοίso as τεand, both, if ἦσανto be τοῦthe τῆςthe πίστεωςtrust, faith, belief μεταδιδόναιto impart λόγουword, statement τολμᾶνto be bold, venture , μόνοιςonly, alone δὲbut, and, however τοῦτονthis ἸουδαίοιςJews κατήγγελλονto preach . When the first and greatest persecution was instigated by the Jews against the church of Jerusalem in connection with the martyrdom of Stephen, and when all the disciples, except the Twelve, were scattered throughout Judea and Samaria, some, as the divine Scripture says, went as far as Phoenicia and Cyprus and Antioch, but could not yet venture to impart the word of faith to the nations, and therefore preached it to the Jews alone.
1-10 τηνικαῦταat that time, then καὶand, also, even, then, next ΠαῦλοςPaul ἐλυμαίνετοto make havoc εἰςinto, unto, for ἔτιever, any longer, yet τότεthen τὴν‎the ἐκκλησίανassembly, church , κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to οἴκουςhouse, home τῶνthe πιστῶνbelieving, faithful εἰσπορευόμενοςto enter σύρωνto drag τεand, both, if ἄνδραςman καὶand, also, even, then, next γυναῖκαςwoman, wife καὶand, also, even, then, next εἰςinto, unto, for φυλακὴνact of guarding; prison παραδιδούςto give over, betray . During this time Paul was still persecuting the church, and entering the houses of believers was dragging men and women away and committing them to prison.
1-11 βαλλομένηςto throw ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but καὶand, also, even, then, next ΦίλιπποςPhilip , εἷςone τῶνthe ἅμαat once, together, both, early ΣτεφάνῳStephen προχειρισθέντωνto appoint εἰςinto, unto, for τὴν‎the διακονίανservice , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τοῖςthe διασπαρεῖσινto scatter γενόμενοςto become, come to be , κάτεισινto go down εἰςinto, unto, for τὴν‎the ΣαμάρειανSamaria , θείαςdivine τεand, both, if ἔμπλεωςquite fully δυνάμεωςability, power κηρύττειto herald πρῶτοςfirst τοῖςthe αὐτόθιhere, in this place τὸνthe λόγονstatement, word , τοσαύτηso great, so much δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same θείαgod, divine συνήργειto co-work χάριςgrace, favour , ὡςas καὶand, also, even, then, next ΣίμωναSimon τὸνthe ΜάγονMagus μετὰ+G=with; +A=after πλείστωνgreatest ὅσωνas great, as much τοῖςthe αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same λόγοιςstatement, word ἑλχθῆναιto wear . Philip also, one of those who with Stephen had been entrusted with the diaconate, being among those who were scattered abroad, went down to Samaria, and being filled with the divine power, he first preached the word to the inhabitants of that country. And divine grace worked so mightily with him that even Simon Magus with many others was attracted by his words.
1-12 ἐπὶon, upon, against τοσοῦτονso great, so large δ᾽but, and, however, now the; oh ΣίμωνSimon βεβοημένοςto shout κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to ἐκεῖνοthat (thing) καιροῦalways, opportune τῶνthe ἠπατημένωνto cheat, deceive ἐκράτειto be strong, to grasp γοητείᾳguile, craft , ὡςas τὴν‎the μεγάληνgreat (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἡγεῖσθαιto consider, regard εἶναιto be δύναμινability, strength τοῦthe ΘεοῦGod . τότεthen δ᾽but, and, however, now οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore καὶand, also, even, then, next οὗτοςthus, so, this τὰςthe ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under τοῦthe ΦιλίππουPhilip δυνάμειpower, ability θείᾳdivine τελουμέναςto fulfil, accomplish καταπλαγεὶςto strike down παραδοξοποιίαςmiraculous thing , ὑποδύεταιto plunge καὶand, also, even, then, next μέχριuntil, unto, as far as λουτροῦbath τὴν‎the εἰςinto, unto, for ΧριστὸνChrist πίστινtrust, faith, belief καθυποκρίνεταιto pretend · Simon was at that time so celebrated, and had acquired, by his jugglery, such influence over those who were deceived by him, that he was thought to be the Great Power of God.1 But at this time, being amazed at the wonderful deeds wrought by Philip through the divine power, he feigned and counterfeited faith in Christ, even going so far as to receive baptism.
1According to Eusebius here, Simon Magus was called τὴν μεγάλην δύναμιν τοῦ θεοῦ. In Acts 8:10 , he was called ἡ δύναμις τοῦ θεοῦ ἡ καλουμένη. According to Irenaeus (I.23.1) he was called "the loftiest of all powers, that is, the one who is father over all things" (sublissimam virtutem, hoc est, eum qui sit nuper omnia Pater). According to Justin Martyr (Apology I.26), he was called τὸν πρῶτον θεόν. According to the Clementine Homilies (II.22) he wished to be called "a certain supreme power of God" (ἁ νωτάτη τις δύναμις). According to the Clementine Recognitions (II.7) he was called the "Standing One" (hinc ergo Stans appellatur).
1-13 who, which, that καὶand, also, even, then, next θαυμάζεινto be amazed ἄξιονworthy εἰςinto, unto, for δεῦροcome here; until now γινόμενονto become, come to be πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τῶνthe ἔτιever, any longer, yet καὶand, also, even, then, next νῦνnow; mouse τὴν‎the ἀπ᾽from, away from ἐκείνουthat μιαρωτάτηνmost defiled μετιόντωνto be among, to go αἵρεσινchoice; heresy , οἳwho, which, that τῇthe τοῦthe σφῶνthem προπάτοροςforefather μεθόδῳtrick, ruse τὴν‎the ἐκκλησίανassembly, church λοιμώδουςpestilential καὶand, also, even, then, next ψωραλέαςitchy νόσουsickness δίκηνjustice, judgment ὑποδυόμενοιto plunge , τὰthe μέγισταgreatest (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) λυμαίνονταιto maltreat τοὺςthe οἷςwho, which ἐναπομάξασθαιto wipe off upon οἷοίso as τεand, both, if ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever εἶενto be τὸνthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same ἀποκεκρυμμένονto hide, conceal δυσαλθῆdeadly καὶand, also, even, then, next χαλεπὸνdifficult, cruel ἰόνrust . And what is surprising, the same thing is done even to this day by those who follow his most impure heresy. For they, after the manner of their forefather, slipping into the Church, like a pestilential and leprous disease greatly afflict those into whom they are able to infuse the deadly and terrible poison concealed in themselves.
1-14 ἤδηnow, already γέyet, doubtless, indeed, also τοιand yet, surely πλείουςmore, greater τούτωνthese ἀπεώσθησανto push away , ὁποῖοίwhat manner, what sort τινεςsomeone, something εἶενto be τὴν‎the μοχθηρίανwickedness ἁλόντεςto catch , ὥσπερjust as οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore καὶand, also, even, then, next the; oh ΣίμωνSimon αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τοῦthe ΠέτρουPeter καταφωραθεὶςto detect ὃςwho, which, that ἦνto be , τὴν‎the προσήκουσανto belong to ἔτισενto pay a price τιμωρίανpunishment . The most of these have been expelled as soon as they have been caught in their wickedness, as Simon himself, when detected by Peter, received the merited punishment.
1-15 ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but γὰρfor, because εἰςinto, unto, for αὔξηνto increase ὁσημέραιdaily προϊόντοςto advance τοῦthe σωτηρίουsalvation, peace offering κηρύγματοςproclamation , οἰκονομίαmanagement τιςsomeone, a certain one/thing ἦγενto lead ἀπὸfrom, away from τῆςthe ΑἰθιόπωνEthiopians γῆςearth, ground, land τῆςthe αὐτόθιhere, in this place βασιλίδοςqueen, princess , κατά+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τιanything, something πάτριονancestral, ancestor ἔθοςhabit, custom ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under γυναικὸςwife, woman τοῦthe ἔθνουςgentile, nation, people εἰςinto, unto, for ἔτιever, any longer, yet νῦνnow; mouse βασιλευομένουto rule , δυνάστηνpowerful · But as the preaching of the Saviour’s Gospel was daily advancing, a certain providence led from the land of the Ethiopians an officer of the queen of that country, for Ethiopia even to the present day is ruled, according to ancestral custom, by a woman.
1-16 ὃνwhom, which, that πρῶτονfirst, before ἐξout, out of ἐθνῶνgentile, nation, people πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τοῦthe ΦιλίππουPhilip δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ἐπιφανείαςappearing, surface τὰthe τοῦthe θείουsulphur; divine, godlike, god λόγουword, statement ὄργιαmystery μετασχόνταto share in τῶνthe τεand, both, if ἀνὰby, each, respectively τὴν‎the οἰκουμένηνinhabited world πιστῶνbelieving, faithful ἀπαρχὴνfirst fruits γενόμενονto become, come to be , πρῶτονfirst, before κατέχειto hold fast, possess λόγοςstatement, word ἐπὶon, upon, against τὴν‎the πάτριονancestral, ancestor παλινοστήσανταto return γῆνearth, ground, land εὐαγγελίσασθαιto preach the gospel τὴν‎the τοῦthe τῶνthe ὅλωνall, whole ΘεοῦGod γνῶσινNoun: knowledge; Verb: to know καὶand, also, even, then, next τὴν‎the ζωοποιὸνquickening εἰςinto, unto, for ἀνθρώπουςman τοῦthe σωτῆροςsaviour ἡμῶνour, of us ἐπιδημίανa sojourn, stay , ἔργῳwork πληρωθείσηςto fill, succeed δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same τῆςtheΑἰθιοπίαEthiopia προφθάσειto go before χεῖραhand, paw αὐτῆςhe, she, it, -self, same τῷthe ΘεῷGod.” He, first among the Gentiles, received of the mysteries of the divine word from Philip in consequence of a revelation, and having become the first-fruits of believers throughout the world, he is said to have been the first on returning to his country to proclaim the knowledge of the God of the universe and the life-giving sojourn of our Saviour among men; so that through him in truth the prophecy obtained its fulfillment, which declares “Ethiopia stretches out her hand unto God.”
1-17 περιεχούσηςto surround προφητείαςprophecy . ἐπὶon, upon, against τούτοιςthese ΠαῦλοςPaul , τὸthe τῆςthe ἐκλογῆςchosen, elect σκεῦοςvessel, goods , οὐκno, not ἐξout, out of ἀνθρώπωνhuman, man οὐδὲneither, nor, never δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ἀνθρώπωνhuman, man , δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ἀποκαλύψεωςrevelation, uncovering δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same ἸησοῦJesus, Joshua ΧριστοῦChrist καὶand, also, even, then, next ΘεοῦGod πατρὸςfather τοῦthe ἐγείραντοςto raise up αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἐκout, out of νεκρῶνmortal, dead , ἀπόστολοςapostle: Nom SingMasc ἀναδείκνυταιto exhibit , δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ὀπτασίαςvision καὶand, also, even, then, next τῆςthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὴν‎the ἀποκάλυψινrevelation οὐρανίουheavenly φωνῆςlanguage, sound, voice, noise ἀξιωθεὶςto think worthy, think right τῆςthe κλήσεωςcalling, invitation . In addition to these, Paul, that chosen vessel,1not of men neither through men, but by the revelation of Jesus Christ himself and of God the Father who raised him from the dead,2was appointed an apostle, being made worthy of the call by a vision and by a voice which was uttered in a revelation from heaven.

Chapter 2

2-1 Καὶand, also, even, then, next δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore τῆςthe παραδόξουstrange, unexpected τοῦthe σωτῆροςsaviour ἡμῶνour, of us ἀναστάσεώςresurrection τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next εἰςinto, unto, for οὐρανοὺςheaven ἀναλήψεωςdeath, ascension τοῖςthe πλείστοιςgreatest, very many ἤδηnow, already περιβοήτουfamous καθεστώσηςto set down , παλαιοῦold κεκρατηκότοςto be strong ἔθουςhabit, custom τοῖςthe τῶνthe ἐθνῶνgentile, nation, people ἄρχουσιruler τὰthe παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along σφίσινthem καινοτομούμεναto be innovative τῷthe τὴν‎the βασίλειονroyal ἀρχὴνrule, beginning ἐπικρατοῦντιto rule over σημαίνεινto indicate , ὡςas ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever μηδὲνno one, nothing αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same διαδιδράσκοιto run away, escape τῶνthe γινομένωνto become, come to be , τὰthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῆςthe ἐκout, out of νεκρῶνmortal, dead ἀναστάσεωςresurrection τοῦthe σωτῆροςsaviour ἡμῶνour, of us ἸησοῦJesus, Joshua εἰςinto, unto, for πάνταςevery, all ἤδηnow, already καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ὅληςwhole, all ΠαλαιστίνηςPalestine βεβοημέναto shout ΠιλᾶτοςPilate ΤιβερίῳTiberius βασιλεῖking κοινοῦταιto communicate , τάςthe τεand, both, if ἄλλαςother, another, next αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same πυθόμενοςto understand τεραστίαςwondrous καὶand, also, even, then, next ὡςas ὅτιbecause, for, that, since μετὰ+G=with; +A=after θάνατονdeath ἐκout, out of νεκρῶνmortal, dead 1 ἀναστὰςto stand up, rise ἤδηnow, already ΘεὸςGod εἶναιto be παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along τοῖςthe πολλοῖςmany πεπίστευκτοto believe, entrust . And when the wonderful resurrection and ascension of our Saviour into heaven of our Saviour was now already generally famous, and in accordance with the ancient custom that those who were ruling οver the nations should report to him who held the imperial office any new movement among them, in οrder that no event might escape his notice, Pilate communicated to the Εmperor Tiberius the story of the resurrection from the dead of our Saviour Jesus as already famous among all throughout all Palestine, together with the information he had gained of his οther wonders and how he was already believed by many to be a God, in that after death he had risen from the dead.1
1Several versions of Pilate’s report are extant, all obviously fictitious.
2-2 τὸνthe δὲbut, and, however ΤιβέριονTiberius ἀνενεγκεῖνto take up ἐπὶon, upon, against τὴν‎the σύγκλητονsenate; summoned ἐκείνηνthat τ᾽and also ἀπώσασθαίto push away φασιto speak, talk, say τὸνthe λόγονstatement, word , τῷthe μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. δοκεῖνto think, seem , ὅτιbecause, for, that, since μὴno, not πρότερονbefore, previous αὐτὴhe, she, it, -self, same τοῦτοthis δοκιμάσασαto try, test ἦνto be , παλαιοῦold νόμουlaw, rule κεκρατηκότοςto be strong μὴno, not ἄλλωςotherwise τινὰsomeone, something παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along ῬωμαίοιςRomans θεοποιεῖσθαιto deify; to make into gods μὴno, not οὐχὶno indeed ψήφῳpebble, ballot καὶand, also, even, then, next δόγματιdoctrine συγκλήτουsummoned , τῇthe δ᾽but, and, however, now ἀληθείᾳtruth , ὅτιbecause, for, that, since μηδὲand not, but not; neither … nor τῆςthe ἐξout, out of ἀνθρώπωνhuman, man ἐπικρίσεώςinterpretation τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next συστάσεωςact of coming into existence the σωτήριοςsalvation τοῦthe θείουsulphur; divine, godlike, god κηρύγματοςproclamation ἐδεῖτοto pray διδασκαλίαdoctrine, teaching · They say that Tiberius referred the matter to the Senate, but that they rejected it, ostensibly because they had not first examined into the matter (for an ancient law prevailed that no one should be made a God by the Romans except by a vote and decree of the Senate), but in reality because the saving teaching of the divine Gospel did not need the confirmation and recommendation of men.
2-3 ταύτῃthis δ᾽but, and, however, now οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ἀπωσαμένηςto push away, reject τὸνthe προσαγγελθένταto announce περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe σωτῆροςsaviour ἡμῶνour, of us λόγονstatement, word τῆςthe ῬωμαίωνRoman, Latin βουλῆςdecision , τὸνthe ΤιβέριονTiberius ἣνwho, which, that καὶand, also, even, then, next πρότερονbefore, previous εἶχενto have, hold γνώμηνpurpose, decision τηρήσανταto watch over, guard , μηδὲνno one, nothing ἄτοπονamiss κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τῆςthe τοῦthe ΧριστοῦChrist διδασκαλίαςteaching, instruction ἐπινοῆσαιto think on . But although the Senate of the Romans rejected the proposition made concerning our Saviour, Tiberius still retained the opinion which he had held at first, and contrived no hostile measures against the teaching of Christ.
2-4 Ταῦταthese (things) ΤερτυλλιανὸςTertullian τοὺςthe ῬωμαίωνRoman, Latin νόμουςlaw ἠκριβωκώςto make exact , ἀνὴρman, male, husband τάthe τεand, both, if ἄλλαother, another, next ἔνδοξοςglorious, honoured καὶand, also, even, then, next τῶνthe μάλισταespecially, most of all, particularly ἐπὶon, upon, against ῬώμηςRome λαμπρῶνbright , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe γραφείσῃto write μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same ῬωμαίωνRoman, Latin φωνῇvoice, sound, noise , μεταβληθείσῃto turn, shift δ᾽but, and, however, now ἐπὶon, upon, against τὴν‎the ἙλλάδαGreece, Greek γλῶσσανtongue ὑπὲρ+ GEN = in behalf of, instead of; + ACC = over, above, beyond ΧριστιανῶνChristians ἀπολογίᾳdefence τίθησινto put, place , κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along λέξινspeech τοῦτονthis ἱστορῶνto inquire into; a wise man, judge τὸνthe τρόπονway, manner, fashion These things are recorded by Tertullian, a man well versed in the laws of the Romans, and in other respects of high repute, and one of those especially distinguished in Rome. In his apology for the Christians, which was written by him in the Latin language, and has been translated into Greek, he writes as follows:
2-5 ἵναin order that, so that δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐκout, out of τῆςthe γενέσεωςgenealogy, kind, species, generation, origin διαλεχθῶμενto argue, pick out τῶνthe τοιούτωνsuch as this νόμωνlaw , παλαιὸνold ἦνto be δόγμαdogma, decree, teaching μηδέναno one, nothing ΘεὸνGod ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under βασιλέωςking καθιεροῦσθαιto dedicate , πρὶνbefore, prior ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under τῆςthe συγκλήτουsummoned δοκιμασθῆναιto try, test . ΜάρκοςMarcus, Mark ΑἰμίλιοςAemilius οὕτωςthus, so, this way περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τινοςsomeone, something εἰδώλουidol πεποίηκενto do, make ἈλβούρνουAlburnus . καὶand, also, even, then, next τοῦτοthis ὑπὲρ+ GEN = in behalf of, instead of; + ACC = over, above, beyond τοῦthe ἡμῶνour, of us λόγουword, statement πεποίηταιto do, make , ὅτιbecause, for, that, since παρ᾽+G=from; +D=before; +A=beside, along ὑμῖνyou ἀνθρωπείᾳhuman δοκιμῇtest, ordeal the θεότηςdivinity δίδοταιto give . ἐὰνif, though, when, whenever μὴno, not ἀνθρώπῳman ΘεὸςGod ἀρέσῃto please , ΘεὸςGod οὐno, not γίνεταιto become, come to be · οὕτωςthus, so, this way κατά+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along γεindeed, doubtless, yet τοῦτοthis ἄνθρωπονman, person ΘεῷGod ἵλεωgracious, propitious εἶναιto be προσῆκενto be present . But in order that we may give an account of these laws from their origin, it was an ancient decree that no one should be consecrated a God by the emperor until the Senate had expressed its approval. Marcus Aurelius did thus concerning a certain idol, Alburnus. And this is a point in favor of our doctrine, that among you divine dignity is conferred by human decree. If a God does not please a man he is not made a God. Thus, according to this custom, it is necessary for man to be gracious to God.
2-6 ΤιβέριοςTiberius οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore , ἐφ᾽on, upon, over, by οὗwhere; who, which, that τὸthe τῶνthe ΧριστιανῶνChristians ὄνομαname εἰςinto, unto, for τὸνthe κόσμονworld, honour εἰσελήλυθενto enter , ἀγγελθέντοςto bear a message αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same ἐκout, out of ΠαλαιστίνηςPalestine τοῦthe δόγματοςdecree, doctrine τούτουthis , ἔνθαthen, there πρῶτονfirst, before ἤρξατοto rule; to begin , τῇthe συγκλήτῳsummoned ἀνεκοινώσατοto communicate , δῆλοςclear, plain ὢνto be ἐκείνοιςthat ὡςas τῷthe δόγματιdoctrine ἀρέσκεταιto make good . the δὲbut, and, however σύγκλητοςsenate; summoned , ἐπεὶsince, because, when, after οὐκno, not αὐτὴhe, she, it, -self, same δεδοκιμάκειto test, ascertain , ἀπώσατοto cast off, push away · the; oh δὲbut, and, however ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same ἀποφάσειsentence, decision ἔμεινενto remain, stay , ἀπειλήσαςto keep away, hold out θάνατονdeath τοῖςthe τῶνthe ΧριστιανῶνChristians κατηγόροιςaccuser .”1 Τῆςthe οὐρανίουheavenly προνοίαςforesight κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to οἰκονομίανmanagement τοῦτ᾽this αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with νοῦνmind, understanding βαλλομένηςto throw , ὡςas ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever ἀπαραποδίστωςuninterruptedly ἀρχὰςbeginning; ruler ἔχωνto have, hold the; oh τοῦthe εὐαγγελίουgood news, gospel λόγοςstatement, word πανταχόσεeverywhere γῆςearth, ground, land διαδράμοιto run across . Tiberius, therefore, under whom the name of Christ made its entry into the world, when this doctrine was reported to him from Palestine, where it first began, communicated with the Senate, making it clear to them that he was pleased with the doctrine. But the Senate, since it had not itself proved the matter, rejected it. But Tiberius continued to hold his own opinion, and threatened death to the accusers of the Christians.1 Heavenly providence had wisely instilled this into his mind in order that the doctrine of the Gospel, unhindered at its beginning, might spread in all directions throughout the world.
1Ekusebius seems to imply that the following sentence is part of Tertullian. This is not so in the Latin manuscripts.

Chapter 3

3-1 Οὕτωthus δῆταindeed οὐρανίῳheavenly δυνάμειpower, ability καὶand, also, even, then, next συνεργίᾳco-operation ἀθρόωςcrowdedly οἷάsuch as τιςsomeone, a certain one/thing ἡλίουeast, sun βολὴa throw τὴν‎the σύμπασανaltogether οἰκουμένηνinhabited world the; oh σωτήριοςsalvation κατηύγαζεto illuminate λόγοςstatement, word . αὐτίκαat once, immediately ταῖςthe θείαιςdivine ἑπομένωςnext, secondarily γραφαῖςscriptures ἐπὶon, upon, againstπᾶσανevery, allπροῄειto advanceτὴνthe γῆνearth, ground, land the; oh φθόγγοςsoundτῶνthe θεσπεσίωνdivinely sounding εὐαγγελιστῶνevangelist αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same καὶand, also, even, then, next ἀποστόλωνapostle , “καὶand, also, even, then, next εἰςinto, unto, for τὰthe πέραταends τῆςthe οἰκουμένηςinhabited world τὰthe ῥήματαword αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same . ” Thus, under the influence of heavenly power, and with the divine co-operation, the doctrine of the Saviour, like the rays of the sun, quickly illumined the whole world; and straightway, in accordance with the divine Scriptures, the voice of the inspired evangelists and apostles went forth through all the earth, and their words to the end of the world.
3-2 καὶand, also, even, then, next δῆταindeed ἀνὰby, each, respectively πάσαςevery, all πόλειςcity, town τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next κώμαςvillage , πληθυούσηςto be full ἅλωνοςthreshing floor δίκηνjustice, judgment , μυρίανδροιcontaining 10,000 inhabitants καὶand, also, even, then, next παμπληθεῖςa vast number ἀθρόωςcrowdedly ἐκκλησίαιchurches συνεστήκεσανto set together, combine , Οἵwho, which, that; +enclitic=the τεand, both, if ἐκout, out of προγόνωνforefather, ancestor διαδοχῆςsuccession καὶand, also, even, then, next τῆςthe ἀνέκαθενfrom above πλάνηςdeception, error παλαιᾷold νόσῳsickness δεισιδαιμονίαςreligion εἰδώλωνimage, idol τὰςthe ψυχὰςsoul, life πεπεδημένοιto bind feet; to shackle , πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τῆςthe τοῦthe ΧριστοῦChrist δυνάμεωςability, power διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of τῆςthe τῶνthe φοιτητῶνdisciple αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same διδασκαλίαςteaching, instruction τεand, both, if ὁμοῦtogether καὶand, also, even, then, next παραδοξοποιίαςmiraculous thing ὥσπερjust as δεινῶνdreadful, terrible δεσποτῶνmaster ἀπηλλαγμένοιto wish to be delivered from εἱργμῶνcage, prison τεand, both, if χαλεπωτάτωνmost difficult λύσινdivorce; interpretation εὑράμενοιto find , πάσηςall, utter, complete μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. δαιμονικῆςdemonic κατέπτυονto spit upon πολυθεΐαςpolytheism , ἕναone δὲbut, and, however μόνονonly, alone εἶναιto be ΘεὸνGod ὡμολόγουνto confess, profess , τὸνthe τῶνthe συμπάντωνthe whole of, all together δημιουργόνmaker , τοῦτόνthis τεand, both, if αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same θεσμοῖςprecept, rule ἀληθοῦςtrue εὐσεβείαςgodliness, religion δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ἐνθέουinspired καὶand, also, even, then, next σώφρονοςtemperate θρῃσκείαςcult, religion τῆςthe ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under τοῦthe σωτῆροςsaviour ἡμῶνour, of us τῷthe τῶνthe ἀνθρώπωνhuman, man βίῳlife, livelihood κατασπαρείσηςto plant ἐγέραιρονto honour, reward . In every city and village, churches were quickly established, filled with multitudes of people like a replenished threshing-floor. And those whose minds, in consequence of errors which had descended to them from their forefathers, were fettered by the ancient disease of idolatrous superstition, were, by the power of Christ operating through the teaching and the wonderful works of his disciples, set free, as it were, from terrible masters, and found a release from the most cruel bondage. They renounced with abhorrence every species of demoniacal polytheism, and confessed that there was only one God, the creator of all things, and him they honoured with the rites of true piety, through the inspired and rational worship which has been planted by our Saviour among men.
3-3 ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but γὰρfor, because τῆςthe χάριτοςgrace ἤδηnow, already τῆςthe θείαςdivine καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐπὶon, upon, against τὰthe λοιπὰremaining, left χεομένηςto pour ἔθνηgentile, nation καὶand, also, even, then, next πρώτουfirst, chief μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὴν‎the ΠαλαιστίνωνPalestine ΚαισάρειανCaesarea ΚορνηλίουCornelius σὺν+D=with ὅλῳwhole τῷthe οἴκῳhouse, home δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ἐπιφανείαςappearing, surface θειοτέραςmore divine ὑπουργίαςservice rendered τεand, both, if ΠέτρουPeter τὴν‎the εἰςinto, unto, for ΧριστὸνChrist πίστινtrust, faith, belief καταδεξαμένουto receive, admit; to discover πλείστωνgreatest τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next ἄλλωνother ἐπ᾽on, upon, against ἈντιοχείαςAntioch ἙλλήνωνGreeks , οἷςwho, which οἱthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὸνthe ΣτεφάνουStephen διωγμὸνpersecution διασπαρέντεςto scatter ἐκήρυξανto preach, proclaim , ἀνθούσηςto blossom, bloom ἄρτιimmediately, now, here, at once καὶand, also, even, then, next πληθυούσηςto be full τῆςthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ἈντιόχειανAntioch ἐκκλησίαςassembly, church ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ταὐτῷsame, he, she, it, -self τεand, both, if ἐπινοῆσαιto think on πλείστωνgreatest ὅσωνas great, as much τῶνthe τεand, both, if ἀπὸfrom, away from ἹεροσολύμωνJerusalem προφητῶνprophet καὶand, also, even, then, next σὺν+D=with αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same ΒαρναβᾶBarnabas καὶand, also, even, then, next ΠαύλουPaul, Paulus ἑτέρουother, another, next τεand, both, if πλήθουςcrowd, number, multitude ἐπὶon, upon, against τούτοιςthese ἀδελφῶνbrother , the ΧριστιανῶνChristians προσηγορίαa name, naming τότεthen πρῶτονfirst, before αὐτόθιhere, in this place ὥσπερjust as ἀπ᾽from, away from εὐθαλοῦςflourishing καὶand, also, even, then, next γονίμουproductive πηγῆςwell, fountain ἀναδίδοταιto deliver . But the divine grace being now poured out upon the rest of the nations, Cornelius, of Caesarea in Palestine, with his whole house, through a divine revelation and the agency of Peter, first received faith in Christ; and after him a multitude of other Greeks in Antioch, to whom those who were scattered by the persecution of Stephen had preached the Gospel. When the church of Antioch was now increasing and abounding, and a multitude of prophets from Jerusalem were on the ground, among them Barnabas and Paul and in addition many other brothers, the name of Christians first sprang up there, as from a fresh and life-giving fountain.
3-4 καὶand, also, even, then, next ἌγαβοςAgabus μένindeed, on the other hand , εἷςone τῶνthe συνόντωνto be with αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same προφητῶνprophet , περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe μέλλεινto intend, be about to ἔσεσθαιto be λιμὸνfamine προθεσπίζειto foretell , ΠαῦλοςPaul δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next ΒαρναβᾶςBarnabas ἐξυπηρετησόμενοιto assist to the utmost τῇthe τῶνthe ἀδελφῶνbrother παραπέμπονταιto send past διακονίᾳservice . And Agabus, one of the prophets who was with them, uttered a prophecy concerning the famine which was about to take place, and Paul and Barnabas were sent to relieve the necessities of the brothers.

Chapter 4

4-1 ΤιβέριοςTiberius μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ἀμφὶabout τὰthe δύοboth, two, double καὶand, also, even, then, next εἴκοσιtwenty βασιλεύσαςto rule ἔτηyear τελευτᾷto end, die ,1 μετὰ+G=with; +A=after δὲbut, and, however τοῦτονthis ΓάϊοςGaius, Caius τὴν‎the ἡγεμονίανregiment, company, headquarters παραλαβώνto take, receive , αὐτίκαat once, immediately τῆςthe ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews ἀρχῆςbeginning; ruler ἈγρίππᾳAgrippa 2 τὸthe διάδημαdiadem, crown περιτίθησινto place around, confer, bestow , βασιλέαking καταστήσαςto appoint αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same τῆςthe τεand, both, if ΦιλίππουPhilip καὶand, also, even, then, next τῆςthe ΛυσανίουLysanias τετραρχίαςtetrarchy , πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with αἷςwhom μετ᾽+G=with; +A=after οὐno, not πολὺνmuch, many αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same χρόνονtime καὶand, also, even, then, next τὴν‎the ἩρῴδουHerod τετραρχίανtetrarchy παραδίδωσινto give over , ἀϊδίῳeternal φυγῇflight, escape τὸνthe ἩρῴδηνHerodοὗτοςthus, so, this δ᾽but, and, however, now ἦνto be the; oh κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὸthe πάθοςpassion, suffering τοῦthe σωτῆροςsaviour, delivererσὺν+D=with καὶand, also, even, then, next τῇthe γυναικὶwoman, wife ἩρῳδιάδιHerodias πλείστωνgreatest ἕνεκαfor sake of, because ζημιώσαςto condemn; to punish αἰτιῶνcause, accusation . μάρτυςmartyr, witness ἸώσηποςJosephus, Joseph καὶand, also, even, then, next τούτωνthese . Tiberius died, after having reigned about twenty-two years,1and Caius succeeded him in the empire. He immediately gave the government of the Jews to Agrippa,2making him king over the tetrarchies of Philip and of Lysanias; in addition to which he bestowed upon him, not long afterward, the tetrarchy of Herod, having punished Herod (the one under whom the Saviour suffered ) and his wife Herodias with perpetual exile on account of numerous crimes. Josephus is a witness to these facts.
1He died March 16, AD 37.
2See Introduction for the family of Herod. This is Agrippa I., son of Aristobulus and grandson of Herod the Great. the Herod mentioned in the next sentence is Herod Antipas, Agrippa’s uncle.
4-2 Κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore τοῦτονthis ΦίλωνPhilo ἐγνωρίζετοto make known πλείστοιςgreatest, very many , ἀνὴρman, male, husband οὐno, not μόνονonly, alone τῶνthe ἡμετέρωνour , ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but καὶand, also, even, then, next τῶνthe ἀπὸfrom, away from τῆςthe ἔξωθενexternal, outward ὁρμωμένωνto set in motion, impel παιδείαςcorrection ἐπισημότατοςmost notable . τὸthe μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore γένοςgeneration, kind, nation, type ἀνέκαθενfrom above ἙβραῖοςHebrew ἦνto be , τῶνthe δ᾽but, and, however, now ἐπ᾽on, upon, against ἈλεξανδρείαςAlexandria ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τέλειto end διαφανῶνtransparent οὐδενὸςnone, no one, nothing χείρωνworse , περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around δὲbut, and, however τὰthe θεῖαdivine καὶand, also, even, then, next πάτριαof one’s father μαθήματαknowledge ὅσονas long, as much, all τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next ὁπηλίκονhowever big εἰσενήνεκταιto carry into πόνονdistress, pain , ἔργῳwork πᾶσιevery, all δῆλοςclear, plain , καὶand, also, even, then, next περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὰthe φιλόσοφαphilosophic δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐλευθέριαliberty τῆςthe ἔξωθενexternal, outward παιδείαςcorrection οἷόςsuch as τιςsomeone, a certain one/thing ἦνto be , οὐδὲνno one, nothing δεῖto owe, be necessary, be needful λέγεινto speak, talk, say , ὅτεafter that, when, while μάλισταespecially, most of all, particularly τὴν‎the κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΠλάτωναPlato καὶand, also, even, then, next ΠυθαγόρανPythagoras ἐζηλωκὼςto emulate ἀγωγήνdeportment , διενεγκεῖνto carry over ἅπανταςall, every, whole τοὺςthe καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ἑαυτὸνhimself, herself, itself ἱστορεῖταιto inquire into a thing, to learn by inquiry . Under this emperor, Philo became known; a man most celebrated not only among many of our own, but also among many scholars without the Church. He was a Hebrew by birth, but was inferior to none of those who held high dignities in Alexandria. How exceedingly he labored in the Scriptures and in the studies of his nation is plain to all from the work which he has done. How familiar he was with philosophy and with the liberal studies of foreign nations, it is not necessary to say, since he is reported to have surpassed all his contemporaries in the study of Platonic and Pythagorean philosophy, to which he particularly devoted his attention.

Chapter 5

5-1 καὶand, also, even, then, next δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore τὰthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΓάϊονGaius, Caius οὗτοςthus, so, this ἸουδαίοιςJews συμβάνταto meet, happen, occur πέντεfive βιβλίοιςbook, scroll παραδίδωσινto give over , ὁμοῦtogether τὴν‎the ΓαΐουCaius, Gaius διεξιὼνto go through; to keep apart φρενοβλάβειανinsanity , ὡςas ΘεὸνGod ἑαυτὸνhimself, herself, itself ἀναγορεύσαντοςto proclaim publicly καὶand, also, even, then, next μυρία10,000 περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὴν‎the ἀρχὴνrule, beginning ἐνυβρικότοςto insult , τάςthe τεand, both, if κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews ταλαιπωρίαςmisery καὶand, also, even, then, next ἣνwho, which, that αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same στειλάμενοςto keep away, avoid ἐπὶon, upon, against τῆςthe ῬωμαίωνRoman, Latin πόλεωςcity ὑπὲρ+ GEN = in behalf of, instead of; + ACC = over, above, beyond τῶνthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὴν‎the ἈλεξάνδρειανAlexandria ὁμοεθνῶνfellow countryman ἐποιήσατοto do, make πρεσβείανdelegation of elders , ὅπωςthat, because, when τεand, both, if ἐπὶon, upon, against τοῦthe ΓαΐουCaius, Gaius καταστὰςto put in place, ordain ὑπὲρ+ GEN = in behalf of, instead of; + ACC = over, above, beyond τῶνthe πατρίωνpaternal νόμωνlaw , οὐδένno one, none τιanything, something πλέονmore γέλωτοςlaughter καὶand, also, even, then, next διασυρμῶνridicule ἀπηνέγκατοto carry away , μικροῦsmall, few δεῖνit is necessary; to bind καὶand, also, even, then, next τὸνthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῆςthe ζωῆςlife ἀνατλὰςto endure κίνδυνονdanger . He recounts at the same time the madness of Caius: how he called himself a god, and performed as emperor innumerable acts of tyranny; and he describes further the miseries of the Jews under him, and gives a report of the embassy upon which he himself was sent to Rome in behalf of his fellow-countrymen in Alexandria; how when he appeared before Caius in behalf of the laws of his fathers he received nothing but laughter and ridicule, and almost incurred the risk of his life.
5-2 Μέμνηταιto remember καὶand, also, even, then, next τούτωνthese the; oh ἸώσηποςJosephus, Joseph , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ὀκτωκαιδεκάτῳeighteenth τῆςthe Ἀρχαιολογίαςancient history κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along λέξινspeech ταῦταthese (things) γράφωνto writeκαὶand, also, even, then, next δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore στάσεωςdissension, standing ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἈλεξανδρείᾳAlexandria γενομένηςto become, come to be ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews τεand, both, if οἳwho, which, that ἐνοικοῦσιto dwell in, inhabit , καὶand, also, even, then, next ἙλλήνωνGreeks , τρεῖςthree Ἀφ᾽from ἑκατέραςeach τῆςthe στάσεωςdissension, standing πρεσβευταὶambassador αἱρεθέντεςto grasp παρῆσανto be here, be present πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τὸνthe ΓάϊονGaius, Caius . Josephus also makes mention of these things in the eighteenth book of his Antiquities, in the following words: A sedition having arisen in Alexandria between the Jews that dwell there and the Greeks, three deputies were chosen from each faction and went to Caius.
5-3 καὶand, also, even, then, next ἦνto be γὰρfor, because τῶνthe ἈλεξανδρέωνAlexandria, Alexandrians πρέσβεωνhonoured εἷςone ἈπίωνApion , ὃςwho, which, that πολλὰmany, much εἰςinto, unto, for τοὺςthe ἸουδαίουςJews ἐβλασφήμησενto blaspheme, slander , ἄλλαother, another, next τεand, both, if λέγωνto speak, talk, say καὶand, also, even, then, next ὡςas τῶνthe ΚαίσαροςCaesar τιμῶνto honour περιορῷενto look around upon · πάντωνevery, all γοῦνtherefore, hence , ὅσοιall who τῇthe ῬωμαίωνRoman, Latin ἀρχῇbeginning, ruler, office ὑποτελεῖςhonour εἶενto be , βωμοὺςaltar τῷthe ΓαΐῳCaius, Gaius καὶand, also, even, then, next ναοὺςtemple ἱδρυμένωνto make to sit down, to seat τάthe τεand, both, if ἄλλαother, another, next ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to πᾶσινevery, all αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ὥσπερjust as τοὺςthe θεοὺςgods δεχομένωνto take, receive , μόνουςonly, alone τούσδεthis ἄδοξονinglorious ἡγεῖσθαιto consider, regard ἀνδριᾶσιstatue τιμᾶνto honour καὶand, also, even, then, next ὅρκιονoath, vow, pleege αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same τὸthe ὄνομαname ποιεῖσθαιto do, make · One of the Alexandrian deputies was Apion, who uttered many slanders against the Jews; among other things saying that they neglected the honours due to Caesar. For while all other subjects of Rome erected altars and temples to Caius, and in all other respects treated him just as they did the gods, they alone considered it disgraceful to honour him with statues and to swear by his name.
5-4 πολλὰmany, much δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next χαλεπὰdifficult, hard ἈπίωνοςApion εἰρηκότοςto speak, talk, say , ὑφ᾽+G=by; +A=under ὧνwho, whom, which ἀρθῆναιto remove ἤλπιζενto hope τὸνthe ΓάϊονGaius, Caius καὶand, also, even, then, next εἰκὸςprobably, likely ἦνto be , ΦίλωνPhilo the; oh προεστὼςto champion τῶνthe ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews τῆςthe πρεσβείαςembassy , ἀνὴρman, male, husband τὰthe πάνταevery, all ἔνδοξοςglorious, honoured ἈλεξάνδρουAlexander τεand, both, if τοῦthe ἀλαβάρχουAlabarch ἀδελφὸςbrother ὢνto be καὶand, also, even, then, next φιλοσοφίαςlove of wisdom οὐκno, not ἄπειροςinexperienced , οἷόςsuch as τεand, both, if ἦνto be ἐπ᾽on, upon, against ἀπολογίᾳdefence χωρεῖνto go, grasp, accept τῶνthe κατηγορημένωνto bring charges , And when Apion had uttered many severe charges by which he hoped that Caius would be aroused, as indeed was likely, Philo, the chief of the Jewish embassy, a man celebrated in every respect, a brother of Alexander the Alabarch, and not unskilled in philosophy, was prepared to enter upon a defence in reply to his accusations.
5-5 διακλείειto stop progress δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ΓάϊοςGaius, Caius , κελεύσαςto command, order ἐκποδὼνout of the way ἀπελθεῖνto go away, depart , περιοργήςvery angry τεand, both, if ὢνto be φανερὸςvisible ἦνto be ἐργασόμενόςto work, labour τιanything, something δεινὸνterrible αὐτούςhe, she, it, -self, same . But Caius prevented him and ordered him to leave, and being very angry, it was plain that he meditated some severe measure against them.
5-6 the; oh δὲbut, and, however ΦίλωνPhilo ἔξεισιto go out περιυβρισμένοςto insult wantonly , καίand, also, even, then, next φησινto affirm, say πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τοὺςthe ἸουδαίουςJews οἳwho, which, that περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἦσανto be , ὡςas χρὴit is necessary, ought θαρρεῖνto be brave; be encouraged , ΓαΐουCaius, Gaius μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same ὠργισμένουto irritate, anger , ἔργῳwork δὲbut, and, however ἤδηnow, already τὸνthe ΘεὸνGod ἀντιπαρεξάγοντοςto lead on against . ” And Philo departed covered with insult and told the Jews that were with him to be of good courage; for while Caius was raging against them he was in fact already contending with God.
5-7 Ταῦταthese (things) the; oh ἸώσηποςJosephus, Joseph . καὶand, also, even, then, next αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same δὲbut, and, however the; oh ΦίλωνPhilo ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to who, which, that συνέγραψενto write down ΠρεσβείᾳEmbassy τὰthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along μέροςin detail, partly, one after another ἀκριβῶςaccurately, exactly τῶνthe τότεthen πραχθέντωνto pass through, pass over αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same δηλοῖto indicate, signify , ὧνwho, whom, which τὰthe πλεῖσταvery great, most παρείςto be present; to leave alone; to pierce , ἐκεῖναthat μόναonly, alone παραθήσομαιto commit, entrust , δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ὧνwho, whom, which τοῖςthe ἐντυγχάνουσιto plead, intreat προφανὴςclear, plain γενήσεταιto become, come to be δήλωσιςmanifestation τῶνthe ἅμαat once, together, both, early τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next οὐκno, not εἰςinto, unto, for μακρὸνlong τῶνthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τοῦthe ΧριστοῦChrist τετολμημένωνto have courage ἕνεκενbecause of ἸουδαίοιςJews συμβεβηκότωνto walk together . Thus far Josephus. And Philo himself, in the work on the Embassy which he wrote, describes accurately and in detail the things which were done by him at that time. But I shall omit the most of them and record only those things which will make clearly evident to the reader that the misfortunes of the Jews came upon them not long after their daring deeds against Christ and on account of the same.
5-8 πρῶτονfirst, before δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΤιβέριονTiberius ἐπὶon, upon, against μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. τῆςthe ῬωμαίωνRoman, Latin πόλεωςcity ἱστορεῖto inquire into; record ΣηιανόνSejanus ΣηιανόνSejanus , τῶνthe τότεthen παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along βασιλεῖking πολλὰmany, much δυνάμενονto be able , ἄρδηνutterly τὸthe πᾶνevery, all ἔθνοςgentile, nation, people ἀπολέσθαιto destroy, ruin, perish, loose σπουδὴνdiligent, speed, haste εἰσαγηοχέναιto lead into , ἐπὶon, upon, against δὲbut, and, however τῆςthe ἸουδαίαςJudaea ΠιλᾶτονPilate , καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ὃνwhom, which, that τὰthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὸνthe σωτῆραsaviour, deliverer τετόλμητοto have courage , περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὸthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἹεροσολύμοιςJerusalem ἔτιever, any longer, yet τότεthen συνεστὸςto set together, combine ἱερὸνtemple ἐπιχειρήσαντάto put a hand on τιanything, something παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along τὸthe ἸουδαίοιςJews ἐξόνto be permitted, be proper , τὰthe μέγισταgreatest (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same ἀναταράξαιto stir up , And in the first place he relates that at Rome in the reign of Tiberius, Sejanus, who at that time enjoyed great influence with the emperor, made every effort to destroy the Jewish nation utterly; and that in Judea, Pilate, under whom the crimes against the Saviour were committed, attempted something contrary to the Jewish law in respect to the temple, which was at that time still standing in Jerusalem, and excited them to the greatest tumults.

Chapter 6

6-1 μετὰ+G=with; +A=after δὲbut, and, however τὴν‎the ΤιβερίουTiberius τελευτὴνend, death, limit ΓάϊονGaius, Caius τὴν‎the ἀρχὴνrule, beginning παρειληφόταto receive from , πολλὰmany, much μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. εἰςinto, unto, for πολλοὺςmany, much καὶand, also, even, then, next ἄλλαother, another, next ἐνυβρίσαιto insult , πάντωνevery, all δὲbut, and, however μάλισταespecially, most of all, particularly τὸthe πᾶνevery, all ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews ἔθνοςgentile, nation, people οὐno, not σμικρὰsmall, little καταβλάψαιto hurt, damage · After the death of Tiberius, Caius received the empire, and, besides innumerable other acts of tyranny against many people, he greatly afflicted especially the whole nation of the Jews.
6-2 who, which, that καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to βραχεῖshort, little πάρεστινto be present διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of τῶνthe αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same καταμαθεῖνto observe, examine φωνῶνlanguages, voices, sounds , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to αἷςwhom κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along λέξινspeech ταῦταthese (things) γράφειto write These things we may learn briefly from the words of Philo, who writes as follows:
6-3 Τοσαύτηso great, so much μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore τιςsomeone, a certain one/thing the τοῦthe ΓαΐουCaius, Gaius περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὸthe ἦθοςmanners ἦνto be ἀνωμαλίαcaprice πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with ἅπανταςall, every, whole , διαφερόντωςdifferently from δὲbut, and, however πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τὸthe ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews γένοςgeneration, kind, nation, type , who, which, that χαλεπῶςdifficultly ἀπεχθανόμενοςto be hated, incur hatred τὰςthe μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ταῖςthe ἄλλαιςother πόλεσινcities προσευχάςprayer , ἀπὸfrom, away from τῶνthe κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to ἈλεξάνδρειανAlexandria ἀρξάμενοςto begin; to rule , σφετερίζεταιto appropriate , καταπλήσαςto fill completely εἰκόνωνlikeness, image καὶand, also, even, then, next ἀνδριάντωνstatue τῆςthe ἰδίαςone’s own, distinct μορφῆςform, shape, naturethe; oh γὰρfor, because ἑτέρωνother, another, next ἀνατιθέντωνto dedicate ἐφιείςto send to; to set upon , αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same ἱδρύετοto make to sit down, to seat δυνάμειpower, ability ) , τὸνthe δ᾽but, and, however, now ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe ἱεροπόλειholy city νεώνnew , ὃςwho, which, that λοιπὸςremaining ἦνto be ἄψαυστοςuntouched, sacred , ἀσυλίαςinviolability ἠξιωμένοςto think, deem worthy; to clean from rust τῆςthe πάσηςall, utter, complete , μεθηρμόζετοto correct, change places καὶand, also, even, then, next μετεσχημάτιζενto change form of εἰςinto, unto, for οἰκεῖονhousehold, relative ἱερόνtemple , ἵναin order that, so that ΔιὸςDios, Zeus Ἐπιφανοῦςevident Νέουnew χρηματίζῃto negotiate, warn ΓαΐουCaius, Gaius . ” “So great was the caprice of Caius in his conduct toward all, and especially toward the nation of the Jews. The latter he so bitterly hated that he appropriated to himself their places of worship in the other cities, and beginning with Alexandria he filled them with images and statues of himself (for in permitting others to erect them he really erected them himself). The temple in the holy city, which had hitherto been left untouched, and had been regarded as an inviolable asylum, he altered and transformed into a temple of his own, that it might be called the temple of the visible Jupiter, the younger Caius.”
6-4 Μυρίαcountless μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ἄλλαother, another, next δεινὰso and so; dreadful, horrible καὶand, also, even, then, next πέραbeyond πάσηςall, utter, complete διηγήσεωςrecord, account the; oh αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὴν‎the ἈλεξάνδρειανAlexandria συμβεβηκόταto meet, happen, occur ἸουδαίοιςJews ἐπὶon, upon, against τοῦthe δηλουμένουto hurt, to make visible ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to δευτέρῳsecond, again συγγράμματιwriting who, which, that ἐπέγραψενto graze, mark the surfaceπερὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around ἀρετῶνvirtue1 ἱστορεῖto inquire into; record · συνᾴδειto sing with δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same καὶand, also, even, then, next the; oh ἸώσηποςJosephus, Joseph , ὁμοίωςsimilarly, likewise ἀπὸfrom, away from τῶνthe ΠιλάτουPilate χρόνωνtime καὶand, also, even, then, next τῶνthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τοῦthe σωτῆροςsaviour τετολμημένωνto have courage τὰςthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along παντὸςevery, all τοῦthe ἔθνουςgentile, nation, people ἐνάρξασθαιto begin the offering σημαίνωνto signify συμφοράςmisfortune, calamity . Innumerable other terrible and almost indescribable calamities which came upon the Jews in Alexandria during the reign of the same emperor, are recorded by the same author in a second work, to which he gave the title, On the Virtues.1 With him agrees also Josephus, who likewise indicates that the misfortunes of the whole nation began with the time of Pilate, and with their daring crimes against the Saviour.
1This is the only possible translation of the Greek as it stands. Yet there is little doubt but that On the Virtues is an alternative title of the Embassy. Either Eusebius made a slip, or there is a primitive error in the text, which should be emended and translated in agreement with the rendering of Rufinus, “In the second of the books which he entitled On the Virtues.”
6-5 ἄκουεto hear δ᾽but, and, however, now οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore οἷαsuch as, of what sort καὶand, also, even, then, next οὗτοςthus, so, this ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to δευτέρῳsecond, again τοῦthe ἸουδαϊκοῦJewish πολέμουbattle, war αὐταῖςhe, she, it, -self, same συλλαβαῖςword, syllable δηλοῖto indicate, signify λέγωνto speak, talk, say Hear what he says in the second book of his Jewish War, where he writes as follows:
6-6 Πεμφθεὶςto send δὲbut, and, however εἰςinto, unto, for ἸουδαίανJudaea ἐπίτροποςguardian ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under ΤιβερίουTiberius ΠιλᾶτοςPilate νύκτωρby night κεκαλυμμέναςto cover, conceal εἰςinto, unto, for ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem παρεισκομίζειto bring in τὰςthe ΚαίσαροςCaesar εἰκόναςlikeness, image · σημαῖαιflag, standard καλοῦνταιto call, name . τοῦτοthis μετ᾽+G=with; +A=after ἡμέρανday μεγίστηνgreatest (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) ταραχὴνtrouble, tumult ἤγειρενto awake, raise up, arouse τοῖςthe ἸουδαίοιςJews . Οἵwho, which, that; +enclitic=the τεand, both, if γὰρfor, because ἐγγὺςnear, nearby, ready πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τὴν‎the ὄψινface, appearance ἐξεπλάγησανto amaze , ὡςas πεπατημένωνto tread, walk αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same τῶνthe νόμωνlaw · οὐδὲνno one, nothing γὰρfor, because ἀξιοῦσινto esteem ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe πόλειcity δείκηλονrepresentation τίθεσθαιto put, place . ” Pilate being sent to Judea as procurator by Tiberius, secretly carried veiled images of the emperor, called ensigns, to Jerusalem by night. The following day this caused the greatest disturbance among the Jews. For those who were near were confounded at the sight, beholding their laws, as it were, trampled under foot. For they allow no image to be set up in their city.
6-7 Ταῦταthese (things) δὲbut, and, however συγκρίναςto interpret, explain τῇthe τῶνthe εὐαγγελίωνgood news γραφῇscripture, writing , εἴσῃto appear; to be; to go; to know ὡςas οὐκno, not εἰςinto, unto, for μακρὸνlong αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same μετῆλθενto go over to ἣνwho, which, that ἔρρηξανto tear apart, rip ἐπ᾽on, upon, against αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same ΠιλάτουPilate φωνήνvoice, tone, noise , δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ἧςwho, which, that οὐκno, not ἄλλονother, another, next or, either, than; +πριν=before μόνονonly, alone ἔχεινto have, hold ἐπεβόωνto call upon ΚαίσαραCaesar βασιλέαking . Comparing these things with the writings of the evangelists, you will see that it was not long before there came upon them the penalty for the exclamation which they had uttered under the same Pilate, when they cried out that they had no other king than Caesar.1
6-8 εἶταthen, after that δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next ἄλληνother, another, next ἑξῆςafter, next the; oh αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same συγγραφεὺςwriter ἱστορεῖto inquire into; record μετελθεῖνto go over to αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same συμφορὰνinjury ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τούτοιςtheseμετὰ+G=with; +A=after δὲbut, and, however ταῦταthese (things) ταραχὴνtrouble, tumult ἑτέρανother, another, next ἐκίνειto set in motion , τὸνthe ἱερὸνtemple θησαυρόνtreasure, treasury , καλεῖταιto call δὲbut, and, however κορβανᾶςcorban, treasury , εἰςinto, unto, for καταγωγὴνlanding place, home, aqueduct ὑδάτωνwater ἐξαναλίσκωνto spend entirely · κατῄειto go down δὲbut, and, however ἀπὸfrom, away from τριακοσίων300 σταδίωνstade distance . πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τοῦτοthis τοῦthe πλήθουςcrowd, number, multitude ἀγανάκτησιςindignation ἦνto be , καὶand, also, even, then, next τοῦthe ΠιλάτουPilate παρόντοςto come here, be present εἰςinto, unto, for ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem , περιστάντεςto place around ἅμαat once, together, both, early κατεβόωνto cry out . the; oh δὲbut, and, however προῄδειto know beforehand γὰρfor, because αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same τὴν‎the ταραχὴνtrouble, tumult καὶand, also, even, then, next τῷthe πλήθειmultitude; great number τοὺςthe στρατιώταςsoldiers ἐνόπλουςarmed , ἐσθήσεσινclothing ἰδιωτικαῖςone's own κεκαλυμμένουςto cover, conceal , ἐγκαταμίξαςto be mixed in καὶand, also, even, then, next ξίφειsword, rapier μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. χρήσασθαιto proclaim, provide κωλύσαςto hinder, prevent , ξύλοιςwood δὲbut, and, however παίεινto strike; to eat; to play τοὺςthe κεκραγόταςto croak, scream to encourage , σύνθημαshibboleth δίδωσινto give ἀπὸfrom, away from τοῦthe βήματοςjudgment seat, footstool, tribunal . τυπτόμενοιto beat, strike δὲbut, and, however οἱthe ἸουδαῖοιJews, Judea πολλοὶmany, much μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under τῶνthe πληγῶνplague , πολλοὶmany, much δὲbut, and, however ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under σφῶνthem αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe φυγῇflight, escape καταπατηθέντεςto trample underfoot ἀπώλοντοto ruin, destroy, perish , πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with δὲbut, and, however τὴν‎the συμφορὰνinjury τῶνthe ἀνῃρημένωνto take up καταπλαγὲνto strike down τὸthe πλῆθοςlarge crowd ἐσιώπησενto be silent . ” The same writer further records that after this another calamity overtook them. He writes as follows: After this he stirred up another tumult by making use of the holy treasure, which is called Corban, in the construction of an aqueduct three hundred stadia in length. The multitude were greatly displeased at it, and when Pilate was in Jerusalem they surrounded his tribunal and gave utterance to loud complaints. But he, anticipating the tumult, had distributed through the crowd armed soldiers disguised in citizen’s clothing, forbidding them to use the sword, but commanding them to strike with clubs those who should make an outcry. To them he now gave the preconcerted signal from the tribunal. And the Jews being beaten, many of them perished in consequence of the blows, while many others were trampled under foot by their own countrymen in their flight, and thus lost their lives. But the multitude, overawed by the fate of those who were slain, held their peace.
6-9 Ἐπὶon, upon, against τούτοιςthese μυρίας10,000 ἄλλαςother, another, next ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same ἹεροσολύμοιςJerusalem κεκινῆσθαιto set in motion νεωτεροποιίαςrevolutionary spriit the; oh αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same ἐμφαίνειto display, show , παριστὰςto cause to stand ὡςas οὐδαμῶςby no means, not ἐξout, out of ἐκείνουthat διέλιπονto intermit, cease τὴν‎the τεand, both, if πόλινcity καὶand, also, even, then, next τὴν‎the ἸουδαίανJudaea ἅπασανwhole, all στάσειςdissension καὶand, also, even, then, next πόλεμοιwar καὶand, also, even, then, next κακῶνevil, bad ἐπάλληλοιin close order μηχαναίa war engine, crane , εἰςinto, unto, for ὅτεafter that, when, while τὸthe πανύστατονlast of all the κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΟὐεσπασιανὸνVespasian αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same μετῆλθενto go over to πολιορκίαsiege . ἸουδαίουςJews μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ὧνwho, whom, which κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τοῦthe ΧριστοῦChrist τετολμήκασινto have courage , ταύτῃthis πῃhow?;, somewhere, anywhere τὰthe ἐκout, out of τῆςthe θείαςdivine μετῄειto go among δίκηςjustice, decision . In addition to these the same author records many other tumults which were stirred up in Jerusalem itself, and shows that from that time seditions and wars and mischievous plots followed each other in quick succession, and never ceased in the city and in all Judea until finally the siege of Vespasian overwhelmed them. Thus the divine vengeance overtook the Jews for the crimes which they dared to commit against Christ.

Chapter 7

7-1 Οὐκno, not ἀγνοεῖνto be ignorant δὲbut, and, however ἄξιονworthy ὡςas καὶand, also, even, then, next αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἐκεῖνονthat τὸνthe ἐπὶon, upon, against τοῦthe σωτῆροςsaviour ΠιλᾶτονPilate κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΓάϊονGaius, Caius , οὗwhere; who, which, that τοὺςthe χρόνουςtime διέξιμενto go through , τοσαύταιςso great, so much περιπεσεῖνto fall κατέχειto hold fast, possess λόγοςstatement, word συμφοραῖςmisfortune , ὡςas ἐξout, out of ἀνάγκηςnecessity, distress αὐτοφονευτὴνslayer of oneself ἑαυτοῦhimself, herself, themselves καὶand, also, even, then, next τιμωρὸνavenging αὐτόχειραhand-made γενέσθαιto become, come to be , τῆςthe θείαςdivine , ὡςas ἔοικενto be like , δίκηςjustice, decision οὐκno, not εἰςinto, unto, for μακρὸνlong αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same μετελθούσηςto go among . It is worthy of note that Pilate himself, who was governor in the time of our Saviour, is reported to have fallen into such misfortunes under Caius, whose times we are recording, that he was forced to become his own murderer and executioner; and thus divine vengeance, as it seems, was not long in overtaking him.
7-2 ἱστοροῦσινto record as history ἙλλήνωνGreeks οἱthe τὰςthe ὈλυμπιάδαςOlympiads ἅμαat once, together, both, early τοῖςthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along χρόνουςtime πεπραγμένοιςto do, fare ἀναγράψαντεςto engrave and display .1 This is stated by those Greek historians who have recorded the Olympiads, together with the respective events which have taken place in each period.1
1No extant records confirm this statement.

Chapter 8

8-1 Ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but γὰρfor, because ΓάϊονGaius, Caius οὐδ᾽neither, never ὅλοιςwhole, entire, all τέτταρσινfour ἔτεσινyear τὴν‎the ἀρχὴνrule, beginning κατασχόνταto hold fast ΚλαύδιοςClaudius αὐτοκράτωρone’s own master διαδέχεταιto receive in turn ·1 Caius had held the power not quite four years, when he was succeeded by the emperor Claudius.1
1Jan. 24, AD 41.
8-2 καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ὃνwhom, which, that λιμοῦfamine 1 τὴν‎the οἰκουμένηνinhabited world πιέσαντοςto press down, pack (τοῦτοthis δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next οἱthe πόρρωfar τοῦthe καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ἡμᾶςwe, us λόγουword, statement συγγραφεῖςauthor, historian ταῖςthe αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same ἱστορίαιςhistory, inquiry παρέδοσανto deliver up, betray ), the κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὰςthe ΠράξειςActs τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle ἈγάβουAgabus προφήτουprophet περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe μέλλεινto intend, be about to ἔσεσθαιto be λιμὸνfamine ἐφ᾽on, upon, over, by ὅληνall, whole τὴν‎the οἰκουμένηνinhabited world πέραςend, farthest part ἐλάμβανενto take, receive πρόρρησιςprophecy . Under him the world was visited with a famine,1which writers that are entire strangers to our religion have recorded in their histories. And thus the prediction of Agabus recorded in the Acts of the Apostles, according to which the whole world was to be visited by a famine, received its fulfillment.
1Eusebius, influenced by Acts 11:28 , exaggerates the universal character of the famine.
8-3 τὸνthe δὲbut, and, however κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΚλαύδιονClaudius λιμὸνfamine ἐπισημηνάμενοςto mark, indicate ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ταῖςthe ΠράξεσινActs the; oh ΛουκᾶςLuke ἱστορήσαςto inquire into a thing, to learn by inquiry τεand, both, if ὡςas ἄραthen, therefore, perhaps διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of ΠαύλουPaul, Paulus καὶand, also, even, then, next ΒαρναβᾶBarnabas οἱthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ἈντιόχειανAntioch ἀδελφοὶbrother τοῖςthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὴν‎the ἸουδαίανJudaea ἐξout, out of ὧνwho, whom, which ἕκαστοςeach, every ηὐπόρειto prosper, thrive διαπεμψάμενοιto send word εἴησανto be , ἐπιφέρειto bring, grant λέγωνto speak, talk, say · And Luke, in the Acts, after mentioning the famine in the time of Claudius, and stating that the brothers of Antioch, each according to his ability, sent to the brothers of Judea by the hands of Paul and Barnabas,1adds the following account.

Chapter 9

9-1 κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to ἐκεῖνονthat δὲbut, and, however τὸνthe καιρόνa while, season, time , δῆλονclear, evident δ᾽but, and, however, now ὅτιbecause, for, that, since τὸνthe ἐπὶon, upon, against ΚλαυδίουClaudius , ἐπέβαλενto cast upon, throw, wipe off ἩρῴδηςHerod the; oh βασιλεὺςking τὰςthe χεῖραςhands κακῶσαίto afflict τιναςsomeone, something τῶνthe ἀπὸfrom, away from τῆςthe ἐκκλησίαςassembly, church , ἀνεῖλενto destroy, kill, take away δὲbut, and, however ἸάκωβονJames, Jacob τὸνthe ἀδελφὸνbrother ἸωάννουJohn μαχαίρᾳdagger, sword . ” Now about that time (it is clear that he means the time of Claudius) Herod the King stretched forth his hands to vex certain of the Church. And he killed James the brother of John with the sword.1
9-2 περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τούτουthis δ᾽but, and, however, now the; oh ΚλήμηςClement τοῦthe ἸακώβουJacob, James καὶand, also, even, then, next ἱστορίανhistory, story, account μνήμηςmemory ἀξίανworthy of ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe τῶνthe ὙποτυπώσεωνHypotyposes ἑβδόμῃseventh παρατίθεταιto place ὡςas ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever ἐκout, out of παραδόσεωςtradition τῶνthe πρὸbefore αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same φάσκωνto state ὅτιbecause, for, that, since δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore the; oh εἰσαγαγὼνto bring in αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same εἰςinto, unto, for δικαστήριονcourt house, tribunal , μαρτυρήσανταto bear witness αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἰδὼνto behold, see, know κινηθείςto move , ὡμολόγησενto confess, praise εἶναιto be καὶand, also, even, then, next αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same ἑαυτὸνhimself, herself, itself ΧριστιανόνChristian . And concerning this James, Clement, in the seventh book of his Hypotyposes, relates a story which is worthy of mention; telling it as he received it from those who had lived before him. He says that the one who led James to the judgment-seat, when he saw him bearing his testimony, was moved, and confessed that he was himself also a Christian.
9-3 συναπήχθησανto lead away οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ἄμφωboth , ” φησίνto affirm, say , “καὶand, also, even, then, next κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὴν‎the ὁδὸνroad, way ἠξίωσενto esteem, think worthy ἀφεθῆναιto dismiss, allow, forgive αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under τοῦthe ἸακώβουJacob, James · the; oh δὲbut, and, however ὀλίγονfew, small σκεψάμενοςto search, look , “εἰρήνηpeace σοιyou εἶπενto speak, talk, say καὶand, also, even, then, next κατεφίλησενto kiss αὐτόνhe, she, it, -self, same . καὶand, also, even, then, next οὕτωςthus, so, this way ἀμφότεροιboth, either ὁμοῦtogether ἐκαρατομήθησανto behead . ” They were both therefore, he says, led away together; and on the way he begged James to forgive him. And he, after considering a little, said, Peace be with you, and kissed him. And thus they were both beheaded at the same time.
9-4 Τότεthen δῆταindeed , ὥςas, so φησινto affirm, say the θείαgod, divine γραφήscripture , ἰδὼνto behold, see, know ἩρῴδηςHerod ἐπὶon, upon, against τῇthe τοῦthe ἸακώβουJacob, James ἀναιρέσειto take away, destroy; murder, killing πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with ἡδονῆςpleasure γεγονὸςto become, come to be τὸthe πραχθὲνto do, commit τοῖςthe ἸουδαίοιςJews , ἐπιτίθεταιto lay, put upon καὶand, also, even, then, next ΠέτρῳPeter , δεσμοῖςchains, bonds τεand, both, if αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same παραδούςto give over , ὅσονas long, as much, all οὔπωnot yet καὶand, also, even, then, next τὸνthe κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same φόνονmurder ἐνήργησενto work effectively ἄνwhatever, wherever, whoever , εἰCONJ: if, since μὴno, not διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of θείαςdivine ἐπιφανείαςappearing, surface , ἐπιστάντοςto set, place upon αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same νύκτωρby night ἀγγέλουangel, messenger , παραδόξωςunexpectedly τῶνthe εἱργμῶνcage, prison ἀπαλλαγείςto set free , ἐπὶon, upon, against τὴν‎the τοῦthe κηρύγματοςproclamation ἀφεῖταιto send forth διακονίανservice . καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰthe μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΠέτρονPeter οὕτωςthus, so, this way εἶχενto have, hold οἰκονομίαςmanagement . And then, as the divine Scripture says, Herod, upon the death of James, seeing that the deed pleased the Jews, attacked Peter also and committed him to prison, and would have slain him if he had not, by the divine appearance of an angel who came to him by night, been wonderfully released from his bonds, and thus liberated for the service of the Gospel.1 Such was the providence of God in respect to Peter.

Chapter 10

10-1 Τὰthe δέbut, and, however γεindeed, doubtless, yet τῆςthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle ἐγχειρήσεωςan attempt τοῦthe βασιλέωςking οὐκέτ᾽no more ἀναβολῆςwrinkle, mantle εἴχετοto have, hold , ἅμαat once, together, both, early γέyet, doubtless, indeed, also τοιand yet, surely αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same the; oh τῆςthe θείαςdivine δίκηςjustice, decision τιμωρὸςavenging διάκονοςdeacon, servant μετῄειto go among , παραυτίκαmomentary μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τὴν‎the τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle ἐπιβουλήνplot , ὡςas the τῶνthe ΠράξεωνActs ἱστορεῖto inquire into; record γραφήscripture , The consequences of the king’s undertaking against the apostles were not long deferred, but the avenging minister of divine justice overtook him immediately after his plots against them, as the Book of Acts records.
10-2 ὁρμήσανταto set in motion, impel μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ἐπὶon, upon, against τὴν‎the ΚαισάρειανCaesarea , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἐπισήμῳprominent, notable δ᾽but, and, however, now ἐνταῦθαhere, in this place ἑορτῆςfeast, holy day 1 ἡμέρᾳday λαμπρᾷbright, gorgeous καὶand, also, even, then, next βασιλικῇroyal κοσμησάμενονto arrange orderly ἐσθῆτιclothing ὑψηλόνhigh, lofty τεand, both, if πρὸbefore βήματοςjudgment seat, footstool, tribunal δημηγορήσανταto speak publicly · τοῦthe γάρfor, because τοιand yet, surely δήμουpeople παντὸςevery, all ἐπευφημήσαντοςto applaud ἐπὶon, upon, against τῇthe δημηγορίᾳpublic speech ὡςas ἐπὶon, upon, against ΘεοῦGod φωνῇvoice, sound, noise καὶand, also, even, then, next οὐκno, not ἀνθρώπουman , παραχρῆμαimmediately τὸthe λόγιονoracle 2 πατάξαιto smite αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἄγγελονangel, messenger κυρίουlord ἱστορεῖto inquire into; record , γενόμενόνto become, come to be τεand, both, if σκωληκόβρωτονworm-eaten ἐκψῦξαιto swoon . For when he had journeyed to Caesarea, on a notable feast-day,1clothed in a splendid and royal garment, he delivered an address to the people from a lofty throne in front of the tribunal. And when all the multitude applauded the speech, as if it were the voice of a god and not of a man, the Scripture2relates that an angel of the Lord smote him, and being eaten of worms he gave up the ghost.3
1The feast was probably that Pro salute Caesaris which was celebrated every four years and was due in AD 44 when Herod probably died.
2Note that Eusebius uses the word λόγιον of the Acts; in view of the fact that the word, literally “oracle,” is generally used of the Old Testament it might almost be rendered by “Scripture.”
3Acts 12:23
10-3 θαυμάσαιto wonder, admire δ᾽but, and, however, now ἄξιονworthy τῆςthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὴν‎the θείανdivine γραφὴscripture, document καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῷδεthe τῷthe παραδόξῳstrange, unexpected συμφωνίαςharmonious, concord τὴν‎the τοῦthe ἸωσήπουJosephus, Joseph ἱστορίανhistory, story, account , καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ἣνwho, which, that ἐπιμαρτυρῶνto warn, testify τῇthe ἀληθείᾳtruth δῆλόςobvious ἐστινto be , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τόμῳscroll τῆςthe Ἀρχαιολογίαςancient history ἐννεακαιδεκάτῳnineteenth , ἔνθαthen, there αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same γράμμασινscripture ὧδέhere, hither, there, thus πωςperhaps, somehow, something like τὸthe Θαῦμαwonder διηγεῖταιto describe . We must admire the account of Josephus for its agreement with the divine Scriptures concerning this wonderful event; for he clearly bears witness to the truth in the nineteenth book of his Antiquities, where he relates the wonder in the following words:
10-4 Τρίτονthird δ᾽but, and, however, now ἔτοςyear αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same βασιλεύοντιto reign τῆςthe ὅληςwhole, all ἸουδαίαςJudaea πεπλήρωτοto fill , καὶand, also, even, then, next παρῆνto be present εἰςinto, unto, for πόλινcity ΚαισάρειανCaesarea , who, which τὸthe πρότερονbefore, previous ΣτράτωνοςStrato πύργοςtower 1 ἐκαλεῖτοto call . συνετέλειto do, finish δ᾽but, and, however, now ἐνταῦθαhere, in this place θεωρίαςsight, spectacle εἰςinto, unto, for τὴν‎the ΚαίσαροςCaesar τιμήνhonour, value, price, precious , ὑπὲρ+ GEN = in behalf of, instead of; + ACC = over, above, beyond τῆςthe ἐκείνουthat σωτηρίαςsalvation ἑορτήνfeast, holy day, a festival τιναsomeone, something ταύτηνthis ἐπιστάμενοςto understand , καὶand, also, even, then, next παρ᾽+G=from; +D=before; +A=beside, along αὐτὴνhe, she, it, -self, same ἤθροιστοto gather together τῶνthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὴν‎the ἐπαρχίανprovince ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τέλειto end καὶand, also, even, then, next προβεβηκότωνto advance εἰςinto, unto, for ἀξίανworthy of πλῆθοςlarge crowd . He had completed the third year of his reign over all Judea when he came to Caesarea, which was formerly called Strato’s Tower. There he held games in honour of Caesar, learning that this was a festival observed in behalf of Caesar’s safety. At this festival was collected a great multitude of the highest and most honourable men in the province.
1Which was located northwest of Jerusalem. In the time of Strabo there was simply a small town at this point, called “Strato’s Tower”; but about 10 BC Herod the Great built the city of Caesarea, which soon became the principal Roman city of Palestine, and was noted for its magnificence. It became, later, the seat of an important Christian school, and played quite a part in Church history. Eusebius himself was Bishop of Caesarea. It was a city of importance, even in the time of the crusades, but is now a scene of utter desolation.
10-5 δευτέρᾳsecond, again (Monday) δὲbut, and, however τῶνthe θεωριῶνsight, spectacle ἡμέρᾳday στολὴνlong garment ἐνδυσάμενοςto put on, wear ἐξout, out of ἀργύρουsilver πεποιημένηνto do, make πᾶσανevery, all , ὡςas θαυμάσιονwonderful, amazing ὑφὴνa web εἶναιto be , παρῆλθενto proceed, go, depart εἰςinto, unto, for τὸthe θέατρονspectacle, theatre ἀρχομένηςto begin ἡμέραςday . ἔνθαthen, there ταῖςthe πρώταιςfirst, former, before τῶνthe ἡλιακῶνsolar, of the sun ἀκτίνωνray, beam ἐπιβολαῖςassault, attack the; oh ἄργυροςsilver, money καταυγασθείςto illuminate , θαυμασίωςwonderfully ἀπέστιλβενto be bright from oil , μαρμαίρωνto flash τιanything, something φοβερὸνfearsome, fearful καὶand, also, even, then, next τοῖςthe εἰςinto, unto, for αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἀτενίζουσιto look intently φρικῶδεςhorrible . And on the second day of the games he proceeded to the theater at break of day, wearing a garment entirely of silver and of wonderful texture. And there the silver, illuminated by the reflection of the sun’s earliest rays, shone marvelously, gleaming so brightly as to produce a sort of fear and terror in those who gazed upon him.
10-6 εὐθὺςimmediately δὲbut, and, however οἱthe κόλακεςflatterer τὰςthe οὐδὲνno one, nothing ἐκείνῳthat πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with ἀγαθοῦgood ἄλλοςother, another, next ἄλλοθενfrom elsewhere φωνὰςvoice, noise, sound ἀνεβόωνto cry aloud , ΘεὸνGod προσαγορεύοντεςto addressεὐμενήςkindlyτεand, both, ifεἴηςto beἐπιλέγοντεςto choose , “εἰCONJ: if, since καὶand, also, even, then, next μέχριuntil, unto, as far as νῦνnow; mouse ὡςas ἄνθρωπονman, person ἐφοβήθημενto fear , ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but τοὐντεῦθενhence κρείττονάbetter σεyou θνητῆςmortal φύσεωςnatural endowment, physically ὁμολογοῦμενto promise, assure .’ And immediately his flatterers, some from one place, others from another, raised up their voices in a way that was not for his good, calling him a god, and saying, 'Be merciful; if up to this time we have feared you as a man, henceforth we confess that you are superior to the nature of mortals.'
10-7 οὐκno, not ἐπέπληξενto rebuke, reprove τούτοιςthese the; oh βασιλεὺςking οὐδὲneither, nor, never τὴν‎the κολακείανflattery ἀσεβοῦσανto be impious, act profanely ἀπετρίψατοto wear out . The king did not rebuke them, nor did he reject their impious flattery.
10-8 ἀνακύψαςto unbend, lift up head δὲbut, and, however μετ᾽+G=with; +A=after ὀλίγονfew, small , τῆςthe ἑαυτοῦhimself, herself, themselves κεφαλῆςhead ὑπερκαθεζόμενονto sit down εἶδενto see, behold, know ἄγγελονangel, messenger .1 But after a little, looking up, he saw an angel sitting above his head.1
1Eusebius is usually very accurate in his quotations, but here he varies from the text of Josephus, who says “he saw an owl sitting on a certain rope over his head, and at once understood that it was a messenger (ἄγγελος) of evil, as it had formerly been of good.” the allusion is to the story that when Agrippa, at the lowest ebb of his misfortunes, was in prison in Rome he saw an owl and regarded it as a harbinger of better days, which did indeed soon come (Josephus, Ant. xviii. 6.7).
10-9 τοῦτονthis εὐθὺςimmediately ἐνόησενto perceive κακῶνevil, bad εἶναιto be αἴτιονresponsible, guilty , τὸνthe καὶand, also, even, then, next ποτεonce, ever, at any time τῶνthe ἀγαθῶνgood γενόμενονto become, come to be , καὶand, also, even, then, next διακάρδιονheart-piercing ἔσχενto have, hold ὀδύνηνpain, grief , And this he quickly perceived would be the cause of evil as it had once been the cause of good fortune, and he was smitten with a heart-piercing pain.
10-10 ἄθρουνin heaps, crowds δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same τῆςthe κοιλίαςabdomen, belly προσέφυσενto make to grow ἄλγημαpain , μετὰ+G=with; +A=after σφοδρότητοςvehemence, violence ἀρξάμενονto begin . And immediate distress, beginning with the greatest violence, seized his bowels.
10-11 ἀναθεωρῶνto consider οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τοὺςthe φίλουςfriend , “the; oh ΘεὸςGod ὑμῖνyou ἐγώI, me ,’ φησίνto affirm, say , “ἤδηnow, already καταστρέφεινto overturn ἐπιτάττομαιto put upon τὸνthe βίονlife, livelihood , παραχρῆμαimmediately τῆςthe εἱμαρμένηςto receive as one’s portion τὰςthe ἄρτιimmediately, now, here, at once μουmy, of me κατεψευσμέναςto tell lies against φωνὰςvoice, noise, sound ἐλεγχούσηςto disgrace, put to shame . the; oh κληθεὶςto call ἀθάνατοςdeathless ὑφ᾽+G=by; +A=under ὑμῶνyou , ἤδηnow, already θανεῖνto die ἀπάγομαιto lead away . δεκτέονreceived δὲbut, and, however τὴν‎the πεπρωμένηνto furnish, offer, give , who, which, that ΘεὸςGod βεβούληταιto want, wish, will, plan . καὶand, also, even, then, next γὰρfor, because βεβιώκαμενto live οὐδαμῇnowhere, in no place φαύλωςeasily , ἀλλ᾽otherwise, however, but ἐπὶon, upon, against τῆςthe μακαριζομένηςto bless μακρότητοςlength . ’ And looking upon his friends he said, ‘I, your god, am now commanded to depart this life; and fate thus on the spot disproves the lying words you have just uttered concerning me. He who has been called immortal by you is now led away to die; but our destiny must be accepted as God has determined it. For we have passed our life by no means ingloriously, but in that splendor which is called happiness.’
10-12 ταῦταthese (things) δὲbut, and, however λέγωνto speak, talk, say ἐπιτάσειan increase in intensity τῆςthe ὀδύνηςpain, grief κατεπονεῖτοto subdue · μετὰ+G=with; +A=after σπουδῆςspeed, haste, anxiety οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore εἰςinto, unto, for τὸthe βασίλειονroyal ἐκομίσθηto carry off , καὶand, also, even, then, next διῇξεto rush through λόγοςstatement, word εἰςinto, unto, for πάνταςevery, all ὡςas ἔχοιto have, hold τοῦthe τεθνάναιto die, be killed παντάπασιaltogether, all in all μετ᾽+G=with; +A=after ὀλίγονfew, small . the πληθὺςfullness δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτίκαat once, immediately σὺν+D=with γυναιξὶwife, woman καὶand, also, even, then, next παισὶνchildren, servants ἐπὶon, upon, against σάκκονsackcloth καθεσθεῖσαto seat oneself τῷthe πατρίῳpaternal, ancestral νόμῳlaw τὸνthe ΘεὸνGod ἱκέτευονto supplicate ὑπὲρ+ GEN = in behalf of, instead of; + ACC = over, above, beyond τοῦthe βασιλέωςking , οἰμωγῆςwailing τεand, both, if πάντ᾽every, all ἦνto be ἀνάπλεαquite full of καὶand, also, even, then, next θρήνωνdirge, lamentation . ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ὑψηλῷhigh, lofty δ᾽but, and, however, now the; oh βασιλεὺςking δωματίῳa little room κατακείμενοςto lie down καὶand, also, even, then, next κάτωdown, bottom, below, under βλέπωνto see αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same πρηνεῖςprostrate προπίπτονταςto fall prostrate , ἄδακρυςwithout tears οὐδ᾽neither, never αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same ἔμενενto remain . And when he had said this he labored with an increase of pain. He was accordingly carried in haste to the palace, while the report spread among all that the king would undoubtedly soon die. But the multitude, with their wives and children, sitting on sackcloth after the custom of their fathers, implored God in behalf of the king, and every place was filled with lamentation and tears. And the king as he lay in a lofty chamber, and saw them below lying prostrate on the ground, could not refrain from weeping himself.
10-13 συνεχεῖςconstantly δ᾽but, and, however, now ἐφ᾽on, upon, over, by ἡμέραςday πέντεfive τῷthe τῆςthe γαστρὸςbelly, womb ἀλγήματιpain, suffering διεργασθείςto cultivate; to destroy , τὸνthe βίονlife, livelihood κατέστρεψενto upset, mislead, overthrow, turn down , ἀπὸfrom, away from γενέσεωςgenealogy, kind, species, generation, origin ἄγωνto lead, bring πεντηκοστὸνfiftieth ἔτοςyear καὶand, also, even, then, next τέταρτονfour, fourth , τῆςthe δὲbut, and, however βασιλείαςroyalty, kingdom, queen ἕβδομονseventh 1 . And after suffering continually for five days with pain in the bowels, he departed this life, in the fifty-fourth year of his age, and in the seventh year of his reign.1
1This would be AD 44, which fits in well with all the other data, except the fact that there are coins of Agrippa referring to his eighth and ninth years: they are usually thought to be spurious, but the point is obscure.
10-14 τέσσαραςfour μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ἐπὶon, upon, against ΓαΐουCaius, Gaius ΚαίσαροςCaesar ἐβασίλευσενto rule, reign ἐνιαυτούςyear , τῆςthe ΦιλίππουPhilip μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. τετραρχίαςtetrarchy εἰςinto, unto, for τριετίανthree years ἄρξαςto be first , τῷthe τετάρτῳfourth δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next τὴν‎the ἩρῴδουHerod προσειληφώςto take besides , τρεῖςthree δ᾽but, and, however, now ἐπιλαβὼνto lay hold of, seize τῆςthe ΚλαυδίουClaudius ΚαίσαροςCaesar αὐτοκρατορίαςsoverignty . ” Four years he ruled under the Emperor Caius — three of them over the tetrarchy of Philip, to which was added in the fourth year that of Herod — and three years during the reign of the Emperor Claudius.
10-15 ταῦταthese (things) τὸνthe ἸώσηπονJosephus, Joseph μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τῶνthe ἄλλωνother ταῖςthe θείαιςdivine συναληθεύονταto be true together γραφαῖςscriptures ἀποθαυμάζωto marvel at · I marvel greatly that Josephus, in these things as well as in others, so fully agrees with the divine Scriptures.
10-16 εἰCONJ: if, since δὲbut, and, however περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὴν‎the τοῦthe βασιλέωςking προσηγορίανname, naming δόξειένto expect τισινsomeone, something διαφωνεῖνto be in discord , ἀλλ᾽otherwise, however, but who, which, that; +enclitic=the γεindeed, doubtless, yet χρόνοςtime καὶand, also, even, then, next the πρᾶξιςacting τὸνthe αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ὄνταto be δείκνυσινto show, explain , ἤτοιwhether, either, indeed κατά+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τιanything, something σφάλμαstumble γραφικὸνwriting ἐνηλλαγμένουto exchange τοῦthe ὀνόματοςto call, name or, either, than; +πριν=before καὶand, also, even, then, next διωνυμίαςpair of names περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὸνthe αὐτόνhe, she, it, -self, same , οἷαsuch as, of what sort καὶand, also, even, then, next περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around πολλούςmany, much , γεγενημένηςbecome, come into being . But if there should seem to any one to be a disagreement in respect to the name of the king, the time at least and the events show that the same person is meant, whether the change of name has been caused by the error of a copyist, or is due to the fact that he, like so many, bore two names.

Chapter 11

11-1 Ἐπεὶsince, because, when, after δὲbut, and, however πάλινagain, back ἐπιστρέψαςto turn the; oh ΛουκᾶςLuke ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ταῖςthe ΠράξεσινActs εἰσάγειto bring in τὸνthe ΓαμαλιὴλGamaliēl ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle σκέψειconsideration λέγονταto speak, talk, say ὡςas ἄραthen, therefore, perhaps κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὸνthe δηλούμενονto hurt; to make visible χρόνονtime ἀνέστηto stand up, arise, rise up ΘευδᾶςTheudas λέγωνto speak, talk, say ἑαυτὸνhimself, herself, itself εἶναιto be τινάsomeone, something , ὃςwho, which, that κατελύθηto destroy , καὶand, also, even, then, next πάντεςevery, all ὅσοιall who ἐπείσθησανto persuade αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same , διελύθησανto scatter · Luke, in the Acts, introduces Gamaliel as saying, at the consultation which was held concerning the apostles, that at the time referred to, rose up Theudas boasting himself to be somebody; who was slain; and all, as many as obeyed him, were scattered.1
11-2 Φέρεto move, carry , καὶand, also, even, then, next τὴν‎the περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τούτουthis παραθώμεθαto run beside; to place beside τοῦthe ἸωσήπουJosephus, Joseph γραφήνscripture .1 Let us therefore add the account of Josephus concerning this man.1
1It is remarkable that Eusebius did not notice that this Theudas cannot really have been referred to by Gamaliel, who was speaking many years before the time of Fadus. Most modern writers on Acts think that nevertheless the Theudas of Acts is the Theudas of Josephus and explain the speech as literary fiction. Some think that “Luke” was mislead by Josephus, who happens to mention Theudas in the same context as Judas of Galilee.
11-3 ἱστορεῖto inquire into; record τοίνυνtruly now, hence, therefore αὖθιςback again κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὸνthe ἀρτίωςright now δεδηλωμένονto make visible; to report αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same λόγονstatement, word αὐτὰhe, she, it, -self, same δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore ταῦταthese (things) κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along λέξινspeech , He records in the work mentioned just above, the following circumstances:
11-4 ΦάδουFadus δὲbut, and, however τῆςthe ἸουδαίαςJudaea ἐπιτροπεύοντοςto be a trustee; to govern , γόηςsorcerer τιςsomeone, a certain one/thing ἀνήρman, male, husband , ΘευδᾶςTheudas ὀνόματιto name, call , πείθειto convince τὸνthe πλεῖστονmost, very great ὄχλονa crowd ἀναλαβόνταto take up τὰςthe κτήσειςpossession ἕπεσθαιto follow πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τὸνthe ἸορδάνηνJordan ποταμὸνriver αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same · While Fadus was procurator of Judea a certain impostor called Theudas persuaded a very great multitude to take their possessions and follow him to the river Jordan.
11-5 προφήτηςprophet γὰρfor, because ἔλεγενto say εἶναιto be , καὶand, also, even, then, next προστάγματιorder, command τὸνthe ποταμὸνriver σχίσαςto split, quake δίοδονpathway ἔφηto speak, talk, say παρέξεινto hand over αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same ῥᾳδίανeasy , καὶand, also, even, then, next ταῦταthese (things) λέγωνto speak, talk, say πολλοὺςmany, much ἠπάτησενto deceive, lead astray . For he said that he was a prophet, and that the river should be divided at his command, and afford them an easy passage.
11-6 οὐno, not μὴνmonth; and yet, indeed, surely εἴασενto allow αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same τῆςthe ἀφροσύνηςfoolishness ὀνάσθαιto profit ΦάδοςFadus , ἀλλ᾽otherwise, however, but ἐξέπεμψενto send forth ἴληνa crowd, band, troop (of men) ἱππέωνhorseman ἐπ᾽on, upon, against αὐτούςhe, she, it, -self, same , ἥτιςwhoever, whichever ἐπιπεσοῦσαto fall upon ἀπροσδοκήτωςunexpectedly, suddenly αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same , πολλοὺςmany, much μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ἀνεῖλενto destroy, kill, take away , πολλοὺςmany, much δὲbut, and, however ζῶνταςto live ἔλαβενreceived, taken , αὐτόνhe, she, it, -self, same τεand, both, if τὸνthe ΘευδᾶνTheudas ζωγρήσαντεςto save alive; to revive ἀποτέμνουσινto cut off, sever τὴν‎the κεφαλὴνhead καὶand, also, even, then, next κομίζουσινto carry off εἰςinto, unto, for ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem . ” And with these words he deceived many. But Fadus did not permit them to enjoy their folly, but sent a troop of horsemen against them, who fell upon them unexpectedly and slew many of them and took many others alive, while they took Theudas himself captive, and cut off his head and carried it to Jerusalem.
11-7 Τούτοιςthese ἑξῆςafter, next καὶand, also, even, then, next τοῦthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΚλαύδιονClaudius γενομένουto become, come to be λιμοῦfamine μνημονεύειto mention, remember ὧδέhere, hither, there, thus πωςperhaps, somehow, something like · Besides this he also makes mention of the famine, which took place in the reign of Claudius, in the following words.

Chapter12

12-1 ἐπὶon, upon, against τούτοιςthese γεindeed, doubtless, yet καὶand, also, even, then, next τὸνthe μέγανgreat (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) λιμὸνfamine κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὴν‎the ἸουδαίανJudaea συνέβηto happen, occur, go with γενέσθαιto become, come to be , καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ὃνwhom, which, that καὶand, also, even, then, next the βασίλισσαqueen, princess ἙλένηHelena πολλῶνmany, much χρημάτωνmoney, goods ὠνησαμένηto buy σῖτονgrain, wheat ἀπὸfrom, away from τῆςthe ΑἰγύπτουEgypt , διένειμενto distribute τοῖςthe ἀπορουμένοιςto worry .” “And at this time it came to pass that the great famine took place in Judea, in which the queen Helen, having purchased grain from Egypt with large sums, distributed it to the needy.”
12-3 σύμφωναharmonious δ᾽but, and, however, now ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever εὕροιςto find καὶand, also, even, then, next ταῦταthese (things) τῇthe τῶνthe ΠράξεωνActs τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle γραφῇscripture, writing , περιεχούσῃto surround ὡςas ἄραthen, therefore, perhaps τῶνthe κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to ἈντιόχειανAntioch μαθητῶνdisciple καθὼςjust as, even as, according to ηὐπορεῖτόto prosper τιςsomeone, a certain one/thing , ὥρισανto determine ἕκαστοςeach, every εἰςinto, unto, for διακονίανservice ἀποστεῖλαιto send away τοῖςthe κατοικοῦσινto dwell ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe ἸουδαίᾳJudea · who, which, that καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐποίησανto do, make , ἀποστείλαντεςto send forth πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τοὺςthe πρεσβυτέρουςelder διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of χειρὸςhand, paw ΒαρναβᾶBarnabas καὶand, also, even, then, next ΠαύλουPaul, Paulus . You will find this statement also in agreement with the Acts of the Apostles, where it is said that the disciples at Antioch, each according to his ability, determined to send relief to the brothers that dwelt in Judea; which also they did, and sent it to the elders by the hands of Barnabas and Paul.
12-4 τῆςthe γέyet, doubtless, indeed, also τοιand yet, surely ἙλένηςHelena , ἧςwho, which, that δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore καὶand, also, even, then, next the; oh συγγραφεὺςwriter ἐποιήσατοto do, make μνήμηνmemory , εἰςinto, unto, for ἔτιever, any longer, yet νῦνnow; mouse στῆλαιpillar διαφανεῖςtransparent ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to προαστείοιςsuburb δείκνυνταιto show τῆςthe νῦνnow; mouse ΑἰλίαςAelia ·1 τοῦthe δὲbut, and, however ἈδιαβηνῶνAdiabeni ἔθνουςgentile, nation, people αὕτηthis βασιλεῦσαιto reign ἐλέγετοto speak, talk, say . But splendid monuments of this Helen, of whom the historian has made mention, are still shown in the suburbs of the city which is now called Aelia.1 But she is said to have been queen of the Adiabeni.
1The name given to Jerusalem by Hadrian.

Chapter 13

13-1 Ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but γὰρfor, because τῆςthe εἰςinto, unto, for τὸνthe σωτῆραsaviour, deliverer καὶand, also, even, then, next κύριονlord ἡμῶνour, of us ἸησοῦνJesus, Joshua ΧριστὸνChrist εἰςinto, unto, for πάνταςevery, all ἀνθρώπουςman ἤδηnow, already διαδιδομένηςto pass on, hand over πίστεωςtrust, faith, belief , the; oh τῆςthe ἀνθρώπωνhuman, man πολέμιοςenemy of war σωτηρίαςsalvation τὴν‎the βασιλεύουσανto reign προαρπάσασθαιto snatch away before πόλινcity μηχανώμενοςto construct , ἐνταῦθαhere, in this place ΣίμωναSimon τὸνthe πρόσθενearlier, former δεδηλωμένονto make visible; to report ἄγειto lead, bring, go , καὶand, also, even, then, next δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore ταῖςthe ἐντέχνοιςwithin the range τἀνδρὸςman, husband συναιρόμενοςto take up together γοητείαιςguile, craft πλείουςmore, greater τῶνthe τὴν‎the ῬώμηνRome οἰκούντωνto dwell ἐπὶon, upon, against τὴν‎the πλάνηνdeception σφετερίζεταιto appropriate . But faith in our Saviour and Lord Jesus Christ having now been diffused among all men, the enemy of man’s salvation contrived a plan for seizing the imperial city for himself. He conducted there the above-mentioned Simon, aided him in his deceitful arts, led many of the inhabitants of Rome astray, and thus brought them into his own power.
13-3 δηλοῖto indicate, signify δὲbut, and, however ταῦθ᾽this the; oh μετ᾽+G=with; +A=after οὐno, not πολὺmany, much τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῷthe καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ἡμᾶςwe, us διαπρέψαςto appear prominent λόγῳstatement, word, proposal ἸουστῖνοςJustin , περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around οὗwhere; who, which, that τὰthe προσήκονταto be present; be at hand κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along καιρὸνtime, season παραθήσομαιto commit, entrust · This is stated by Justin, one of our distinguished writers who lived not long after the time of the apostles. Concerning him I shall speak in the proper place.
13-4 ὃςwho, which, that δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe προτέρᾳfirst; earlier, former, in front of πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with ἈντωνῖνονAntinous ὑπὲρ+ GEN = in behalf of, instead of; + ACC = over, above, beyond τοῦthe καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ἡμᾶςwe, us δόγματοςdecree, doctrine ἀπολογίᾳdefence γράφωνto write ὧδέhere, hither, there, thus φησινto affirm, say · Take and read the work of this man, who in the first Apology which he addressed to Antonine in behalf of our religion writes as follows:
13-5 Καὶand, also, even, then, next μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τὴν‎the ἀνάληψινascension τοῦthe κυρίουlord εἰςinto, unto, for οὐρανὸνheaven, sky προεβάλλοντοto throw toward οἱthe δαίμονεςdemon ἀνθρώπουςman τινὰςsomeone, something λέγονταςto speak, talk, say ἑαυτοὺςourselves, yourselves, themselves εἶναιto be θεούςgod , οἳwho, which, that οὐno, not μόνονonly, alone οὐκno, not ἐδιώχθησανto persecute ὑφ᾽+G=by; +A=under ὑμῶνyou , ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but καὶand, also, even, then, next τιμῶνto honour ἠξιώθησανto think, deem worthy · And after the ascension of the Lord into heaven the demons put forward certain men who said they were gods, and who were not only allowed by you to go unpersecuted, but were even deemed worthy of honours.
13-6 ΣίμωναSimon μένindeed, on the other hand τιναsomeone, something ΣαμαρέαSamaritan , τὸνthe ἀπὸfrom, away from κώμηςvillage λεγομένηςto speak, talk, say ΓίτθωνGittho , ὃςwho, which, that ἐπὶon, upon, against ΚλαυδίουClaudius ΚαίσαροςCaesar διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of τῆςthe τῶνthe ἐνεργούντωνto be in action δαιμόνωνdemon τέχνηςart, trade, craft, occupation δυνάμειςabilities, powers, armies μαγικὰςmagical ποιήσαςto do, make ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe πόλειcity ὑμῶνyou τῇthe βασιλίδιqueen, princess ῬώμῃRome ΘεὸςGod ἐνομίσθηto practise καὶand, also, even, then, next ἀνδριάντιstatue παρ᾽+G=from; +D=before; +A=beside, along ὑμῶνyou ὡςas ΘεὸςGod τετίμηταιto honour ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῷthe ΤίβεριTiber ποταμῷriver μεταξὺbetween τῶνthe δύοboth, two, double γεφυρῶνbridge, dam , ἔχωνto have, hold ἐπιγραφὴνan inscription ῬωμαϊκὴνLatin ταύτηνthis · SIMONI DEO SANCTO,”1 ὅπερthe thing which ἐστὶνto be ΣίμωνιSimon ΘεῷGod ἁγίῳholy . One of them was Simon, a Samaritan of the village of Gitto, who in the reign of Claudius Caesar performed in your imperial city some mighty acts of magic by the art of demons operating in him, and was considered a god, and as a god was honoured by you with a statue, which was erected in the river Tiber, between the two bridges, and bore this inscription in the Latin tongue, Simoni Deo Sancto,”1that is, to Simon the Holy God.
1In 1574, a statue was found on the island of St. Sebastian to which Justin probably referred. Unfortunately for him, it bears the inscription SEMONI SANCO DEO, that is to say, TO THE GOD SEMO SANCUS, thus explaining but not confirming Justin’s improbable story. Semo Sancus was an old Sabine deity, not a Samaritan sorcerer.
13-7 καὶand, also, even, then, next σχεδὸνnearly, almost μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. πάντεςevery, all ΣαμαρεῖςSamaritans , ὀλίγοιlittle, puny, few, brief δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἄλλοιςother, another, next ἔθνεσινgentile, nation, people ὡςas τὸνthe πρῶτονfirst, before ΘεὸνGod ἐκεῖνονthat ὁμολογοῦντεςto promise, assure προσκυνοῦσινto worship . And nearly all the Samaritans and a few even of other nations confess and worship him as the first God.
13-8 καὶand, also, even, then, next ἙλένηνHelena τινάsomeone, something , τὴν‎the συμπερινοστήσασανto go round together with, follow along with αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to ἐκεῖνοthat (thing) τοῦthe καιροῦalways, opportune , πρότερονbefore, previous ἐπὶon, upon, against τέγουςroof σταθεῖσανto make to standἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ΤύρῳTyre τῆςthe ΦοινίκηςPhoenicia , “τὴνthe ἀπ᾽from, away from αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same πρώτηνfirst ἔννοιανknowledge; intent, mind 1 λέγουσινto speak, talk, say .” And there went around with him at that time a certain Helena who had formerly been a prostitute” in Tyre of Phoenicia; “and her they call the first Idea1that proceeded from him.”
1In the curious mixture of philosophical language with mythological concepts which charaacterized the theology of the Graeco-Roman world of the first four centuries after Christ, the word here translated “idea” was one of those used of the various beings proceeding from the original godhead, and bridging as it were the gap between God and Creation.
13-9 Ταῦταthese (things) μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὗτοςthus, so, this · συνᾴδειto sing with δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same καὶand, also, even, then, next ΕἰρηναῖοςIrenaeus , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to πρώτῳfirst τῶνthe πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τὰςthe αἱρέσειςsect, heresy ὁμοῦtogether τὰthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὸνthe ἄνδραmale, husband καὶand, also, even, then, next τὴν‎the ἀνοσίανunholy, profane καὶand, also, even, then, next μιαρὰνdefiled αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same διδασκαλίανteaching ὑπογράφωνto write under , Justin relates these things, and Irenaeus also agrees with him in the first book of his work, Against Heresies, where he gives an account of the man and of his profane and impure teaching.
13-10 ἣνwho, which, that ἐπὶon, upon, against τοῦthe παρόντοςto come here, be present περιττὸνsuperfluous ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever εἴηto be καταλέγεινto recount, tell , παρὸνto be present τοῖςthe βουλομένοιςto want, wish, will, plan καὶand, also, even, then, next τῶνthe μετ᾽+G=with; +A=after αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along μέροςin detail, partly, one after another αἱρεσιαρχῶνschool leader τὰςthe ἀρχὰςbeginning; ruler καὶand, also, even, then, next τοὺςthe βίουςlife, livelihood καὶand, also, even, then, next τῶνthe ψευδῶνfalse, untrue, liar δογμάτωνdecree τὰςthe ὑποθέσειςbasic doctrine or principle τάthe τεand, both, if πᾶσινevery, all αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same ἐπιτετηδευμέναto pursue διαγνῶναιto distinguish , οὐno, not κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along πάρεργονincidental τῇthe δεδηλωμένῃto make visible; to report τοῦthe ΕἰρηναίουIrenaeus παραδεδομέναto hand over βίβλῳbook . It would be superfluous to quote his account here, for it is possible for those who wish to know the origin and the lives and the false doctrines of each of the heresiarchs that have followed him, as well as the customs practiced by them all, to find them treated at length in the above-mentioned work of Irenaeus.
13-11 πάσηςall, utter, complete μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ἀρχηγὸνleader αἱρέσεωςsect, heresy πρῶτονfirst, before γενέσθαιto become, come to be τὸνthe ΣίμωναSimon παρειλήφαμενto receive from · We have understood that Simon was the author of all heresy.
13-12 ἐξout, out of οὗwhere; who, which, that καὶand, also, even, then, next εἰςinto, unto, for δεῦροcome here; until now οἱthe τὴν‎the κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same μετιόντεςto be among, to go αἵρεσινchoice; heresy τὴν‎the σώφροναdiscreet, serious καὶand, also, even, then, next διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of καθαρότηταpurity βίουlife, livelihood παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along τοῖςthe πᾶσινevery, all βεβοημένηνto shout ΧριστιανῶνChristians φιλοσοφίανlove of wisdom ὑποκρινόμενοιto separate, to subject to inquiry , ἧςwho, which, that μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ἔδοξανto think ἀπαλλάττεσθαιto wish to be delivered from περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὰthe εἴδωλαimage, idol δεισιδαιμονίαςreligion οὐδὲνno one, nothing ἧττονless, fewer αὖθιςback again ἐπιλαμβάνονταιto lay hold of, seize , καταπίπτοντεςto fall, drop ἐπὶon, upon, against γραφὰςscriptures, writings καὶand, also, even, then, next εἰκόναςlikeness, image αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same τεand, both, if τοῦthe ΣίμωνοςSimon καὶand, also, even, then, next τῆςthe σὺν+D=with αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same δηλωθείσηςto make visible; to report ἙλένηςHelena θυμιάμασίνincense τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next θυσίαιςsacrifices καὶand, also, even, then, next σπονδαῖςlibation τούτουςthis θρῃσκεύεινto worship ἐγχειροῦντεςto attempt , From his time down to the present those who have followed his heresy have feigned the sober philosophy of the Christians, which is celebrated among all on account of its purity of life. But they nevertheless have embraced again the superstitions of idols, which they seemed to have renounced; and they fall down before pictures and images of Simon himself and of the above-mentioned Helena who was with him; and they venture to worship them with incense and sacrifices and libations.
13-13 τὰthe δὲbut, and, however τούτωνthese αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same ἀπορρητότεραmore forbidden , ὧνwho, whom, which φασιto speak, talk, say τὸνthe πρῶτονfirst, before ἐπακούσανταto hear ἐκπλαγήσεσθαιto expel καὶand, also, even, then, next κατά+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τιanything, something παρ᾽+G=from; +D=before; +A=beside, along αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same λόγιονoracle ἔγγραφονenrolled θαμβωθήσεσθαιto be terrified , θάμβουςwonder ὡςas ἀληθῶςtruly, certainly καὶand, also, even, then, next φρενῶνmidriff, sensitive ἐκστάσεωςamazement καὶand, also, even, then, next μανίαςcrazinesses ἔμπλεαquite full of τυγχάνειto happen, meet , τοιαῦταof such kind ὄνταto be , ὡςas μὴno, not μόνονonly, alone μὴno, not δυνατὰpowerful εἶναιto be παραδοθῆναιto give over γραφῇscripture, writing , ἀλλ᾽otherwise, however, but οὐδὲneither, nor, never χείλεσινlips, shores αὐτὸhe, she, it, -self, same μόνονonly, alone δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ὑπερβολὴνabundance αἰσχρουργίαςshameless conduct τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next ἀρρητοποιίαςunutterable thing ἀνδράσιman, male, husband σώφροσιwise, discreet λαληθῆναιto speak, talk, say . But those matters which they keep more secret than these, concerning which they say that one upon first hearing them would be astonished, and, to use one of the written phrases in vogue among them, would be confounded, are in truth full of amazing things, and of madness and folly, being of such a sort that it is impossible not only to commit them to writing, but also for modest men even to utter them with the lips on account of their excessive baseness and lewdness.
13-14 who, which, that; +enclitic=the τιanything, something ποτὲonce, ever, at any time γὰρfor, because ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever ἐπινοηθείηto think on παντὸςevery, all αἰσχροῦugly, shameful, filthy μιαρώτερονmore defiled , τοῦτοthis πᾶνevery, all ὑπερηκόντισενto overshoot the τῶνδεthis μυσαρωτάτηfoulest, dirtiest αἵρεσιςsect, heresy , ταῖςthe ἀθλίαιςwinning; miserable καὶand, also, even, then, next παντοίωνof all sorts ὡςas ἀληθῶςtruly, certainly κακῶνevil, bad σεσωρευμέναιςto heap γυναιξὶνwoman, wife ἐγκαταπαιζόντωνto mock at . For whatever could be conceived of, viler than the vilest thing — all that has been outdone by this most abominable sect, which is composed of those who make a sport of those miserable females that are literally overwhelmed with all kinds of vices.

Chapter 14

14-1 τοιούτωνsuch as this κακῶνevil, bad πατέραfather καὶand, also, even, then, next δημιουργὸνfabricator, craftsman τὸνthe ΣίμωναSimon κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to ἐκεῖνοthat (thing) καιροῦalways, opportune ὥσπερjust as εἰCONJ: if, since μέγανgreat (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) καὶand, also, even, then, next μεγάλωνgreat (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) ἀντίπαλονrival; wrestling against τῶνthe θεσπεσίωνdivinely sounding τοῦthe σωτῆροςsaviour ἡμῶνour, of us ἀποστόλωνapostle the μισόκαλοςhating the good καὶand, also, even, then, next τῆςthe ἀνθρώπωνhuman, man ἐπίβουλοςplotting against, plotter σωτηρίαςsalvation πονηρὰwicked, evil δύναμιςability, power προυστήσατοto set forth . The evil power, who hates all that is good and plots against the salvation of men, constituted Simon at that time the father and author of such wickedness, as if to make him a mighty antagonist of the great, inspired apostles of our Saviour.
14-2 ὅμωςeven, at the same time δ᾽but, and, however, now οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore the θείαgod, divine καὶand, also, even, then, next ὑπερουράνιοςabove the heavens χάριςgrace, favour τοῖςthe αὐτῆςhe, she, it, -self, same συναιρομένηto take up together διακόνοιςdeacon, servant , δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ἐπιφανείαςappearing, surface αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same καὶand, also, even, then, next παροιμίαιproverb ἀναπτομένηνto kindle, ignite τοῦthe πονηροῦwicked, evil τὴν‎the φλόγαflame who, which, that τάχοςquickly, shortly ἐσβέννυto quench, put out , ταπεινοῦσαto lower δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same καὶand, also, even, then, next καθαιροῦσαto cleanse; to take down πᾶνevery, all ὕψωμαheight ἐπαιρόμενονto lift up κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τῆςthe γνώσεωςknowledge τοῦthe ΘεοῦGod . For that divine and celestial grace which co-operates with its ministers, by their appearance and presence, quickly extinguished the kindled flame of evil, and humbled and cast down through them every high thing that exalted itself against the knowledge of God.1
14-3 διὸtherefore δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore οὔτεneither, nor, and not ΣίμωνοςSimon οὔτ᾽neither … nor ἄλλουother τουof whom τῶνthe τότεthen φυέντωνto bring forth συγκρότημάan organization τιanything, something κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same ἐκείνουςthat τοὺςthe ἀποστολικοὺςapostolic ὑπέστηto resist χρόνουςtime . ὑπερενίκαto prevail over γάρfor, because τοιand yet, surely καὶand, also, even, then, next ὑπερίσχυενto prevail ἅπανταall, every, whole τὸthe τῆςthe ἀληθείαςThummim, truth φέγγοςbrightness who, which, that; +enclitic=the τεand, both, if λόγοςstatement, word αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same the; oh θεῖοςdivine ἄρτιimmediately, now, here, at once θεόθενfrom God(s) ἀνθρώποιςman, mankind, humans ἐπιλάμψαςto shine after ἐπὶon, upon, against γῆςearth, ground, land τεand, both, if ἀκμάζωνto be mature καὶand, also, even, then, next τοῖςthe ἰδίοιςone’s own ἀποστόλοιςapostle ἐμπολιτευόμενοςto be a citizen, hold civil rights . Wherefore neither the conspiracy of Simon nor that of any of the others who arose at that period could accomplish anything in those apostolic times. For everything was conquered and subdued by the splendors of the truth and by the divine word itself which had but lately begun to shine from heaven upon men, and which was then flourishing upon earth, and dwelling in the apostles themselves.
14-4 αὐτίκαat once, immediately the; oh δηλωθεὶςto make visible; to report γόηςsorcerer ὥσπερjust as ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under θείαςdivine καὶand, also, even, then, next παραδόξουstrange, unexpected μαρμαρυγῆςflashing; to flash τὰthe τῆςthe διανοίαςmind, understanding πληγεὶςto strike ὄμματαeye ὅτεafter that, when, while πρότερονbefore, previous ἐπὶon, upon, against τῆςthe ἸουδαίαςJudaea ἐφ᾽on, upon, over, by οἷςwho, which ἐπονηρεύσατοto act wickedly πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τοῦthe ἀποστόλουapostle ΠέτρουPeter κατεφωράθηto detect , μεγίστηνgreatest (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) καὶand, also, even, then, next ὑπερπόντιονover the sea ἀπάραςto depart πορείανjourneying τὴν‎the ἀπ᾽from, away from ἀνατολῶνeast, sun rising ἐπὶon, upon, against δυσμὰςwest, setting (of the sun) ᾤχετοto depart φεύγωνto flee , μόνωςsolitarily ταύτῃthis βιωτὸνworth living αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along γνώμηνpurpose, decision εἶναιto be οἰόμενοςto suppose · Immediately the above-mentioned impostor was smitten in the eyes of his mind by a divine and miraculous flash, and after the evil deeds done by him had been first detected by the apostle Peter in Judea, he fled and made a great journey across the sea from the East to the West, thinking that only thus could he live according to his mind.
14-5 ἐπιβὰςto go into, go upon δὲbut, and, however τῆςthe ῬωμαίωνRoman, Latin πόλεωςcity , συναιρομένηςto take up together αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same τὰthe μεγάλαgreat (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) τῆςthe ἐφεδρευούσηςto sit upon, rest upon ἐνταῦθαhere, in this place δυνάμεωςability, power , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ὀλίγῳsmall, brief, few τοσοῦτονso great, so large τὰthe τῆςthe ἐπιχειρήσεωςto attempt, attack ἤνυστοto accomplish , ὡςas καὶand, also, even, then, next ἀνδριάντοςstatue ἀναθέσειdedicating πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τῶνthe τῇδεthis οἷαsuch as, of what sort ΘεὸνGod τιμηθῆναιto honour . οὐno, not μὴνmonth; and yet, indeed, surely εἰςinto, unto, for μακρὸνlong αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same ταῦταthese (things) προυχώρειto advance . And coming to the city of Rome, by the mighty co-operation of that power which was lying in wait there, he was in a short time so successful in his undertaking that those who dwelt there honoured him as a god by the erection of a statue.
14-6 παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along πόδαςfoot γοῦνtherefore, hence ἐπὶon, upon, against τῆςthe αὐτῆςhe, she, it, -self, same ΚλαυδίουClaudius βασιλείαςroyalty, kingdom, queen the πανάγαθοςabsolutely good καὶand, also, even, then, next φιλανθρωποτάτηmost humane τῶνthe ὅλωνall, whole πρόνοιαprovidence τὸνthe καρτερὸνstrong καὶand, also, even, then, next μέγανgreat (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle , τὸνthe ἀρετῆςpraise, virtue ἕνεκαfor sake of, because τῶνthe λοιπῶνremaining ἁπάντωνall things προήγορονspokesman , ΠέτρονPeter , ἐπὶon, upon, against τὴν‎the ῬώμηνRome ὡςas ἐπὶon, upon, against τηλικοῦτονso great, such as this λυμεῶναcorrupter of morals, spoiler βίουlife, livelihood χειραγωγεῖto lead by the hand · ὃςwho, which, that οἷάsuch as τιςsomeone, a certain one/thing γενναῖοςnoble ΘεοῦGod στρατηγὸςcaptain τοῖςthe θείοιςdivine ὅπλοιςweapon φραξάμενοςto point out, show; to wrap around , τὴν‎the πολυτίμητονhighly honoured ἐμπορίανbusiness, market, trade τοῦthe νοητοῦmental φωτὸςlight ἐξout, out of ἀνατολῶνeast, sun rising τοῖςthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along δύσινwest, setting of sun ἐκόμιζενto take care of , φῶςlight αὐτὸhe, she, it, -self, same καὶand, also, even, then, next λόγονstatement, word ψυχῶνsoul σωτήριονsalvation, peace offering , τὸthe Κήρυγμαpreaching, proclamation τῆςthe τῶνthe οὐρανῶνheaven, sky βασιλείαςroyalty, kingdom, queen , εὐαγγελιζόμενοςto bring good news . But this did not last long. For immediately, during the reign of Claudius, the all-good and gracious Providence, which watches over all things, led Peter, that strongest and greatest of the apostles, and the one who on account of his virtue was the speaker for all the others, to Rome against this great corrupter of life. Clad in divine armor like a noble commander of God, He carried the costly merchandise of the light of the understanding from the East to those who dwelt in the West, proclaiming the light itself, and the word which brings salvation to souls, and preaching the kingdom of heaven.

Chapter 15

15-1 οὕτωthus, even so δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ἐπιδημήσαντοςto live at home αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same τοῦthe θείουsulphur; divine, godlike, god λόγουword, statement , the μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. τοῦthe ΣίμωνοςSimon ἀπέσβηto extinguish καὶand, also, even, then, next παραχρῆμαimmediately σὺν+D=with καὶand, also, even, then, next τῷthe ἀνδρὶmale, man, husband καταλέλυτοto put down, destroy δύναμιςability, power . And thus when the divine word had made its home among them, the power of Simon was quenched and immediately destroyed, together with the man himself.
15-2 Τοσοῦτονso much δ᾽but, and, however, now ἐπέλαμψενto shine in ταῖςthe τῶνthe ἀκροατῶνhearer τοῦthe ΠέτρουPeter διανοίαιςmind εὐσεβείαςgodliness, religion φέγγοςbrightness , ὡςas μὴno, not τῇthe εἰςinto, unto, for ἅπαξonce ἱκανῶςsufficiently ἔχεινto have, hold ἀρκεῖσθαιto be satisfied ἀκοῇhearing, report μηδὲand not, but not; neither … nor τῇthe ἀγράφῳunwritten τοῦthe θείουsulphur; divine, godlike, god κηρύγματοςproclamation διδασκαλίᾳinstruction, teaching , παρακλήσεσινexhortation δὲbut, and, however παντοίαιςof all sorts ΜάρκονMarcus, Mark , οὗwhere; who, which, that τὸthe εὐαγγέλιονgood news, gospel φέρεταιto bear, carry, endure , ἀκόλουθονfollowing ὄνταto be ΠέτρουPeter , λιπαρῆσαιto persist ὡςas ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever καὶand, also, even, then, next διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of γραφῆςdocument ὑπόμνημαremembrance, memorial τῆςthe διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of λόγουword, statement παραδοθείσηςto deliver, hand over αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same καταλείψοιto leave διδασκαλίαςteaching, instruction , μὴno, not πρότερόνfirst, previously τεand, both, if ἀνεῖναιto let loose, quit or, either, than; +πριν=before κατεργάσαθαιto achieve, accomplish τὸνthe ἄνδραmale, husband , καὶand, also, even, then, next ταύτῃthis αἰτίουςcause, guilty, fault γενέσθαιto become, come to be τῆςthe τοῦthe λεγομένουto speak, talk, say κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΜάρκονMarcus, Mark γραφῆςdocument . And so greatly did the splendor of piety illumine the minds of Peter’s hearers that they were not satisfied with hearing once only, and were not content with the unwritten teaching of the divine Gospel, but with all sorts of entreaties they besought Mark, a follower of Peter, and the one whose Gospel is extant, that he would leave them a written monument of the doctrine which had been orally communicated to them. Nor did they cease until they had prevailed with the man, and had thus become the occasion of the written Gospel which bears the name of Mark.
15-3 γνόνταto know δὲbut, and, however τὸthe πραχθένto do, commit, occur φασιto speak, talk, say τὸνthe ἀπόστολονapostle ἀποκαλύψαντοςto reveal αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same τοῦthe πνεύματοςspirit, breath, wind , ἡσθῆναιto take pleasure τῇthe τῶνthe ἀνδρῶνmale, man, husband προθυμίᾳreadiness κυρῶσαίto confirm, ratify τεand, both, if τὴν‎the γραφὴscripture, document εἰςinto, unto, for ἔντευξινpetition ταῖςthe ἐκκλησίαιςassemblies, churches . And they say that Peter — when he had learned, through a revelation of the Spirit, of that which had been done — was pleased with the zeal of the men, and that the work obtained the sanction of his authority for the purpose of being used in the churches.
15-4 ΚλήμηςClement ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἕκτῳsixth τῶνthe ὙποτυπώσεωνHypotyposes παρατέθειταιto quote; to set forth τὴν‎the ἱστορίανhistory, story, account , συνεπιμαρτυρεῖto corroborate δὲbut, and, however αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same καὶand, also, even, then, next the; oh ἹεραπολίτηςHierapolis ἐπίσκοποςoverseer, bishop ὀνόματιto name, call ΠαπίαςPapias , τοῦthe δὲbut, and, however ΜάρκουMarcus μνημονεύεινto remember τὸνthe ΠέτρονPeter ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe προτέρᾳfirst; earlier, former, in front of ἐπιστολῇepistle · ἣνwho, which, that καὶand, also, even, then, next συντάξαιto compose φασὶνto speak, talk, say ἐπ᾽on, upon, against αὐτῆςhe, she, it, -self, same ῬώμηςRome , σημαίνεινto indicate τεand, both, if τοῦτ᾽this αὐτόνhe, she, it, -self, same , τὴν‎the πόλινcity τροπικώτερονfigurative ΒαβυλῶναBabylon προσειπόνταto refer to διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of τούτωνtheseἀσπάζεταιto greet ὑμᾶςyou, your the ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ΒαβυλῶνιBabylon συνεκλεκτὴchosen together καὶand, also, even, then, next ΜάρκοςMarcus, Mark the; oh υἱόςson μουmy, of me . ” Clement in the eighth book of his Hypotyposes gives this account, and with him agrees the bishop of Hierapolis named Papias. And Peter makes mention of Mark in his first epistle which they say that he wrote in Rome itself, as is indicated by him, when he calls the city, by a figure, Babylon, as he does in the following words: the church that is at Babylon, elected together with you, salutes you; and so does Marcus my son.1

Chapter 16

16-1 Τοῦτονthis δὲbut, and, however ΜάρκονMarcus, Mark πρῶτόνfirst φασινto speak, talk, say ἐπὶon, upon, against τῆςthe ΑἰγύπτουEgypt στειλάμενονto keep away, avoid , τὸthe εὐαγγέλιονgood news, gospel , who, which, that δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore καὶand, also, even, then, next συνεγράψατοto write down , κηρῦξαιto herald , ἐκκλησίαςassembly, church τεand, both, if πρῶτονfirst, before ἐπ᾽on, upon, against αὐτῆςhe, she, it, -self, same ἈλεξανδρείαςAlexandria συστήσασθαιto bring together . And they say that this Mark was the first that was sent to Egypt, and that he proclaimed the Gospel which he had written, and first established churches in Alexandria.
16-2 τοσαύτηso great, so much δ᾽but, and, however, now ἄραthen, therefore, perhaps τῶνthe αὐτόθιhere, in this place πεπιστευκότωνto believe πληθὺςfullness ἀνδρῶνmale, man, husband τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next γυναικῶνwife, woman ἐκout, out of πρώτηςfirst, former ἐπιβολῆςan attack, assault συνέστηto unite, collect δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ἀσκήσεωςexercise, practice, training φιλοσοφωτάτηςmost loving of wisdom τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next σφοδροτάτηςmost violent , ὡςas καὶand, also, even, then, next γραφῆςdocument αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same ἀξιῶσαιto esteem τὰςthe διατριβὰςoccupation καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰςthe συνηλύσειςa meeting, an assembly τάthe τεand, both, if συμπόσιαdrinking party καὶand, also, even, then, next πᾶσανevery, all τὴν‎the ἄλληνother, another, next τοῦthe βίουlife, livelihood ἀγωγὴνdeportment τὸνthe ΦίλωναPhilo · And the multitude of believers, both men and women, that were collected there at the very outset, and lived lives of the most philosophical and excessive asceticism, was so great, that Philo thought it worth while to describe their pursuits, their meetings, their entertainments, and their whole manner of life.

Chapter 17

17-1 ὃνwhom, which, that καὶand, also, even, then, next λόγοςstatement, word ἔχειto have, hold κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΚλαύδιονClaudius ἐπὶon, upon, against τῆςthe ῬώμηςRome εἰςinto, unto, for ὁμιλίανconversation, sermon ἐλθεῖνto come ΠέτρῳPeter , τοῖςthe ἐκεῖσεthere τότεthen κηρύττοντιto herald . It is also said that Philo in the reign of Claudius became acquainted at Rome with Peter, who was then preaching there.
17-2 καὶand, also, even, then, next οὐκno, not ἀπεικὸςunreasonable, improbable ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever εἴηto be τοῦτόthis γεindeed, doubtless, yet , ἐπεὶsince, because, when, after καὶand, also, even, then, next who, which, that; +enclitic=the φαμενto say, affirm αὐτὸhe, she, it, -self, same σύγγραμμαwriting, book , εἰςinto, unto, for ὕστερονlater, afterward καὶand, also, even, then, next μετὰ+G=with; +A=after χρόνουςtime αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same πεπονημένονto work hard , σαφῶςclearly τοὺςthe εἰςinto, unto, for ἔτιever, any longer, yet νῦνnow; mouse καὶand, also, even, then, next εἰςinto, unto, for ἡμᾶςwe, us πεφυλαγμένουςto preserve, keep τῆςthe ἐκκλησίαςassembly, church περιέχειto contain, astonish, surround κανόναςline, rule · Nor is this indeed improbable, for the work of which we have spoken, and which was composed by him some years later, clearly contains those rules of the Church which are even to this day observed among us.
17-3 ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but καὶand, also, even, then, next τὸνthe βίονlife, livelihood τῶνthe παρ᾽+G=from; +D=before; +A=beside, along ἡμῖνus, our ἀσκητῶνa person who practices (something) ὡςas ἔνιto be there; some; in/on μάλισταespecially, most of all, particularly ἀκριβέσταταmost exact, strictest ἱστορῶνto inquire into; a wise man, judge , γένοιτ᾽to become, come to be ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever ἔκδηλοςmanifest, plain οὐκno, not εἰδὼςto know μόνονonly, alone , ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but καὶand, also, even, then, next ἀποδεχόμενοςto accept, receive ἐκθειάζωνto deify τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next σεμνύνωνto exalt, magnify τοὺςthe κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἀποστολικοὺςapostolic ἄνδραςman , ἐξout, out of ἙβραίωνHebrews , ὡςas ἔοικεto be like , γεγονόταςto become, come to be ταύτῃthis τεand, both, if Ἰουδαϊκώτερονmore Jewish τῶνthe παλαιῶνold ἔτιever, any longer, yet τὰthe πλεῖσταvery great, most διατηροῦνταςto observe ἐθῶνcustom . And since he describes as accurately as possible the life of our ascetics, it is clear that he not only knew, but that he also approved, while he venerated and extolled, the apostolic men of his time, who were as it seems of the Hebrew race, and hence observed, after the manner of the Jews, the most of the customs of the ancients.
17-4 πρῶτόνfirst γέyet, doubtless, indeed, also τοιand yet, surely τὸthe μηθὲνno one, nothing πέραbeyond τῆςthe ἀληθείαςThummim, truth οἴκοθενfrom home καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐξout, out of ἑαυτοῦhimself, herself, themselves προσθήσεινto put to οἷςwho, which ἱστορήσεινto inquire into a thing, to learn by inquiry ἔμελλενto intend, be about to , ἀπισχυρισάμενοςto oppose firmly, give a flat denial ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to who, which, that ἐπέγραψενto graze, mark the surface λόγῳstatement, word, proposal περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around βίουlife, livelihood θεωρητικοῦable to perceive or, either, than; +πριν=before ἱκετῶνsuppliant , θεραπευτὰςgodly healer (M) αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰςthe σὺν+D=with αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same γυναῖκαςwoman, wife θεραπευτρίδαςgodly healer (F) ἀποκαλεῖσθαίto recall φησινto affirm, say , τὰςthe αἰτίαςcause, accusation ἐπειπὼνto say besides τῆςthe τοιᾶσδεsuch προσρήσεωςname, adressing , ἤτοιwhether, either, indeed παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along τὸthe τὰςthe ψυχὰςsoul, life τῶνthe προσιόντωνto be added to αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same τῶνthe ἀπὸfrom, away from κακίαςevil, wickedness παθῶνpassions, emotions ἰατρῶνphysician δίκηνjustice, judgment ἀπαλλάττονταςto set free ἀκεῖσθαιto heal, cure καὶand, also, even, then, next θεραπεύεινto care for, heal , or, either, than; +πριν=before τῆςthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὸthe θεῖονdivine, sulphur, godhead καθαρᾶςpure καὶand, also, even, then, next εἰλικρινοῦςpure, sincere θεραπείαςattendance, healing 1 τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next θρῃσκείαςcult, religion ἕνεκαfor sake of, because . In the work to which he gave the title, On a Contemplative Life or on Suppliants, after affirming in the first place that he will add to those things which he is about to relate nothing contrary to truth or of his own invention, he says that these men were called Therapeutae and the women that were with them Therapeutrides. He then adds the reasons for such a name, explaining it from the fact that they applied remedies and healed the souls of those who came to them, by relieving them like physicians, of evil passions, or from the fact that they served1and worshipped the Deity in purity and sincerity.
1The ambiguity is due to the fact that the Greek word may mean “service” or “healing.”
17-5 εἴτ᾽either/or; then; to be οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ἐξout, out of ἑαυτοῦhimself, herself, themselves ταύτηνthis αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same ἐπιτέθειταιto lay upon, put upon τὴν‎the προσηγορίανname, naming , οἰκείωςrelatively, domestically ἐπιγράψαςto mark the surface, graze τῷthe τρόπῳmanner, custom τῶνthe ἀνδρῶνmale, man, husband τοὔνομαnamed , εἴτεeven if; whether/or καὶand, also, even, then, next ὄντωςreally, indeed τοῦτ᾽this αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same ἐκάλουνto call κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to ἀρχὰςbeginning; ruler οἱthe πρῶτοιfirst , μηδαμῶςby no means τῆςthe ΧριστιανῶνChristians πωuntil now προσρήσεωςname, adressing ἀνὰby, each, respectively πάνταevery, all τόπονplace ἐπιπεφημισμένηςto speak about , Whether Philo himself gave them this name, employing an epithet well suited to their mode of life, or whether the first of them really called themselves so in the beginning, since the name of Christians was not yet everywhere known, we need not discuss here.
17-6 οὔno indeed, no! τίwho? what?, someone, something πωuntil now διατείνεσθαιto stretch fully; continue ἀναγκαῖονnecessary · ὅμωςeven, at the same time δ᾽but, and, however, now οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to πρώτοιςfirst τὴν‎the ἀπόταξινseparate assessment αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same τῆςthe οὐσίαςgoods, substance μαρτυρεῖto witness, give evidence , φάσκωνto state ἀρχομένουςto rule, begin φιλοσοφεῖνto be a philospher ἐξίστασθαιto be amazed τοῖςthe προσήκουσιto belong to τῶνthe ὑπαρχόντωνto exist; possessions , ἔπειταafterward, then, next πάσαιςevery, all ἀποταξαμένουςto renounce ταῖςthe τοῦthe βίουlife, livelihood φροντίσινcare , ἔξωoutside τειχῶνwall προελθόνταςto go forward , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to μοναγρίοιςlonely fields καὶand, also, even, then, next κήποιςgarden, oases τὰςthe διατριβὰςoccupation ποιεῖσθαιto do, make , τὰςthe ἐκout, out of τῶνthe ἀνομοίωνunlike, unequal ἐπιμιξίαςa mixing with ἀλυσιτελεῖςunprofitable καὶand, also, even, then, next βλαβερὰςharmful εὖgood, well εἰδόταςto know , τῶνthe κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to ἐκεῖνοthat (thing) καιροῦalways, opportune ταῦθ᾽this , ὡςas εἰκόςreasonable , ἐπιτελούντωνto complete; to prescribe , ἐκθύμῳraging, senseless καὶand, also, even, then, next θερμοτάτῃhottest πίστειbelief, faith τὸνthe προφητικὸνprophetic ζηλοῦνto be jealous ἀσκούντωνto work, exercise βίονlife, livelihood . He bears witness, however, that first of all they renounce their property. When they begin the philosophical mode of life, he says, they give up their goods to their relatives, and then, renouncing all the cares of life, they go forth beyond the walls and dwell in lonely fields and gardens,1knowing well that association with people of a different character is unprofitable and harmful. They did this at that time, as seems probable, under the influence of a spirited and ardent faith, practicing in emulation the prophets' mode of life.
1Possibly “deserts and oases.”
17-7 καὶand, also, even, then, next γὰρfor, because οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore κἀνand if ταῖςthe ὁμολογουμέναιςto promise, agree τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle ΠράξεσινActs ἐμφέρεταιto bear or bring in ὅτιbecause, for, that, since δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore πάντεςevery, all οἱthe τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle γνώριμοιwell-known τὰthe κτήματαfarm, field, possessions καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰςthe ὑπάρξειςexistence; belongings διαπιπράσκοντεςto sell off ἐμέριζονto divide, distribute ἅπασινall καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along who, which, that ἄνwhatever, wherever, whoever τιςsomeone, a certain one/thing χρείανuse, need, lack, employment εἶχενto have, hold , ὡςas μηδὲand not, but not; neither … nor εἶναίto be τιναsomeone, something ἐνδεῆlacking, void παρ᾽+G=from; +D=before; +A=beside, along αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same · ὅσοιall who γοῦνtherefore, hence κτήτορεςproperty owner χωρίωνland, field or, either, than; +πριν=before οἰκιῶνhouse, home ὑπῆρχονto exist; possessions , ὡςas the; oh λόγοςstatement, word φησίνto affirm, say , πωλοῦντεςto sell ἔφερονto bring τὰςthe τιμὰςvalue τῶνthe πιπρασκομένωνto sell , ἐτίθεσάνto put, place τεand, both, if παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along τοὺςthe πόδαςfoot τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle , ὥστεtherefore, so that, in order that διαδίδοσθαιto pass on, hand over ἑκάστῳevery, each καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ὅτιbecause, for, that, since ἄνwhatever, wherever, whoever τιςsomeone, a certain one/thing χρείανuse, need, lack, employment εἶχενto have, hold . For in the Acts of the Apostles, a work universally acknowledged as authentic, it is recorded that all the companions of the apostles sold their possessions and their property and distributed to all according to the necessity of each one, so that no one among them was in want. For as many as were possessors of lands or houses, as the account says, sold them and brought the prices of the things that were sold, and laid them at the apostles' feet, so that distribution was made unto every man according as he had need.1
17-8 Τὰthe παραπλήσιαcoming near δὲbut, and, however τούτοιςthese μαρτυρήσαςto be a witness τοῖςthe δηλουμένοιςto hurt, to make visible the; oh ΦίλωνPhilo συλλαβαῖςword, syllable αὐταῖςhe, she, it, -self, same ἐπιφέρειto bring, grant λέγωνto speak, talk, say · “ πολλαχοῦin many places or times μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore τῆςthe οἰκουμένηςinhabited world ἐστὶνto be τὸthe γένοςgeneration, kind, nation, type · ἔδειit is necessary γὰρfor, because ἀγαθοῦgood τελείουperfect μετασχεῖνto share καὶand, also, even, then, next τὴν‎the ἙλλάδαGreece, Greek καὶand, also, even, then, next τὴν‎the βάρβαρονbarbarous, savage · πλεονάζειto abound δ᾽but, and, however, now ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ΑἰγύπτῳEgypt καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ἕκαστονeach τῶνthe ἐπικαλουμένωνto call upon νομῶνdistrict καὶand, also, even, then, next μάλισταespecially, most of all, particularly περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὴν‎the ἈλεξάνδρειανAlexandria . Philo bears witness to facts very much like those here described and then adds the following account: Everywhere in the world is this race found. “For it was fitting that both Greek and Barbarian should share in what is perfectly good. But the race particularly abounds in Egypt, in each of its so-called nomes, and especially about Alexandria.
17-9 οἱthe δὲbut, and, however πανταχόθενfrom every direction ἄριστοιbest, most valiant , καθάπερeven as, according as εἰςinto, unto, for πατρίδαfatherland, own country θεραπευτῶνworshipper , ἀποικίανremoval, exile στέλλονταιto keep away, avoid πρός+G=to advantage; +D=at, near; +A=to, toward, with τιanything, something χωρίονfarm, field ἐπιτηδειότατονmost suitable, most useful , ὅπερthe thing which ἐστὶνto be ὑπὲρ+ GEN = in behalf of, instead of; + ACC = over, above, beyond λίμνηςlake ΜαρείαςMareia 1 κείμενονto exist, recline ἐπὶon, upon, against γεωλόφουa hill χθαμαλωτέρουcloser to the ground , σφόδραvery much, exceedingly εὐκαίρωςconveniently ἀσφαλείαςsafety, certainty τεand, both, if ἕνεκαfor sake of, because καὶand, also, even, then, next ἀέροςair εὐκρασίαςmildness . ” The best men from every quarter emigrate, as if to a colony of the Therapeutae’s fatherland, to a certain very suitable spot which lies above the Lake Mareia1upon a low hill excellently situated on account of its security and the mildness of the atmosphere.
1More often known as Lake Mareotis, a little south of Alexandria.
17-10 εἶθ᾽then; if only! ἑξῆςafter, next τὰςthe οἰκήσειςto dwell αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same ὁποῖαίwhat sort of τινεςsomeone, something ἦσανto be διαγράψαςto dileneate , περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῶνthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along χώρανcountry ἐκκλησιῶνchurch, assembly ταῦτάthese things φησινto affirm, say · And then a little further on, after describing the kind of houses which they had, he speaks as follows concerning their churches, which were scattered about here and there:
17-11 ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἑκάστῃeach δὲbut, and, however οἰκίᾳhouse, home ἐστὶνto be οἴκημαapartment, jail ἱερὸνtemple who, which, that καλεῖταιto call σεμνεῖονsanctuary καὶand, also, even, then, next μοναστήριονmonastic , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to who, which, that μονούμενοιto make solitary τὰthe τοῦthe σεμνοῦsacred βίουlife, livelihood μυστήριαmystery, secret τελοῦνταιto accomplish; to arise , in each house there is a sacred apartment which is called a sanctuary and monastery, where, quite alone, they perform the mysteries of the religious life.
17-12 μηδὲνno one, nothing εἰσκομίζοντεςto carry in , μὴno, not ποτόνdrink (offering) , μὴno, not σιτίονgrain, dough, bread; food , μηδέand not, but not; neither … nor τιanything, something τῶνthe ἄλλωνother ὅσαall who; as great as πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τὰςthe τοῦthe σώματοςbody, corpse χρείαςuse, need ἀναγκαῖαnecessary , ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but νόμουςlaw καὶand, also, even, then, next λόγιαoracle θεσπισθένταto foretell διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of προφητῶνprophet καὶand, also, even, then, next ὕμνουςhymn καὶand, also, even, then, next τἄλλαthe other οἷςwho, which ἐπιστήμηunderstanding καὶand, also, even, then, next εὐσέβειαgodliness συναύξονταιto increase along with καὶand, also, even, then, next τελειοῦνταιto finish, complete . ” They bring nothing into it, neither drink nor food, nor any of the other things which contribute to the necessities of the body, but only the laws, and the inspired oracles of the prophets, and hymns and such other things as augment and make perfect their knowledge and piety.
17-13 Καὶand, also, even, then, next μετ᾽+G=with; +A=after ἕτεράother φησινto affirm, say · And after some other matters he says:
17-14 Τὸthe δ᾽but, and, however, now ἐξout, out of ἑωθινοῦdaybreak μέχριςuntil, unto ἑσπέραςevening, west διάστημαspace, interval, extent σύμπανwhole, all αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same ἐστινto be ἄσκησιςexercise, training . ἐντυγχάνοντεςto meet γὰρfor, because τοῖςthe ἱεροῖςholy, sacred γράμμασινscripture φιλοσοφοῦσινto love knowledge τὴν‎the πάτριονancestral, ancestor φιλοσοφίανlove of wisdom ἀλληγοροῦντεςto interpret allegoricallly , ἐπειδὴafter, when, because, since σύμβολαsign, seal τὰthe τῆςthe ῥητῆςspoken, stated ἑρμηνείαςinterpretation, explanation, νομίζουσινto think, suppose ἀποκεκρυμμένηςto hide from φύσεωςnatural endowment, physically , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ὑπονοίαιςsuspicion, guess δηλουμένηςto hurt; to make visible . ἔστιto be δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same καὶand, also, even, then, next συγγράμματαwriting, book The whole interval, from morning to evening, is for them a time of exercise. For they read the holy Scriptures, and explain the philosophy of their fathers in an allegorical manner, regarding the written words as symbols of hidden truth which is communicated in obscure figures.
17-15 παλαιῶνold ἀνδρῶνmale, man, husband , οἳwho, which, that τῆςthe αἱρέσεωςsect, heresy αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same ἀρχηγέταιauthor, originator γενόμενοιto become, come to be , πολλὰmany, much μνημεῖαgrave, tomb τῆςthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τοῖςthe ἀλληγορουμένοιςto interpret allegorically ἰδέαςshape ἀπέλιπονto leave behind, forsake , οἷςwho, which καθάπερeven as, according as τισὶνsomeone, something ἀρχετύποιςmodel χρώμενοιto employ, use, treat μιμοῦνταιto imitate, follow τῆςthe προαιρέσεωςchoice, policy τὸνthe τρόπονway, manner, fashion . ” They have also writings of ancient men, who were the founders of their sect, and who left many monuments of the allegorical method. These they use as models, and imitate their principles.
17-16 Ταῦταthese (things) μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ἔοικενto be like εἰρῆσθαιto say τῷthe ἀνδρὶmale, man, husband τὰςthe ἱερὰςsacred ἐξηγουμένωνto tell in full αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same ἐπακροασαμένῳto listen, obey γραφάςscriptures, writings , τάχαperhaps, possibly δ᾽but, and, however, now εἰκόςreasonable , who, which, that φησινto affirm, say ἀρχαίωνearly, ancient παρ᾽+G=from; +D=before; +A=beside, along αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same εἶναιto be συγγράμματαwriting, book , εὐαγγέλιαgood news καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰςthe τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle γραφὰςscriptures, writings διηγήσειςaccounts τέand, both, also, if τιναςsomeone, something κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὸthe εἰκὸςprobably, likely τῶνthe πάλαιformerly, long ago προφητῶνprophet ἑρμηνευτικάςfor interpreting , ὁποίαςof what sort who, which τεand, both, if πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with ἙβραίουςHebrews καὶand, also, even, then, next ἄλλαιother, another, next πλείουςmore, greater τοῦthe ΠαύλουPaul, Paulus περιέχουσινto surround ἐπιστολαίepistle , ταῦτ᾽this εἶναιto be . These things seem to have been stated by a man who had heard them expounding their sacred writings. But it is highly probable that the works of the ancients, which he says they had, were the Gospels and the writings of the apostles, and probably some expositions of the ancient prophets, such as are contained in the Epistle to the Hebrews, and in many others of Paul’s Epistles.
17-17 εἶταthen, after that πάλινagain, back ἐπιστρέψαςto turn ἑξῆςafter, next περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe νέουςnew, young αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same ποιεῖσθαιto do, make ψαλμοὺςpsalm οὕτωςthus, so, this way γράφειto write · “ὥστ᾽for purpose of οὐno, not θεωροῦσιto look at μόνονonly, alone , ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but καὶand, also, even, then, next ποιοῦσινto do, make ᾄσματαsongs καὶand, also, even, then, next ὕμνουςhymn εἰςinto, unto, for τὸνthe ΘεὸνGod διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of παντοίωνof all sorts μέτρωνmeasure καὶand, also, even, then, next μελῶνmember, limb ἀριθμοῖςtotal σεμνοτέροιςmore solemn ἀναγκαίωςnecessary χαράσσοντεςto sharpen . ” Then again he writes as follows concerning the new psalms which they composed: “So that they not only spend their time in meditation, but they also compose songs and hymns to God in every variety of metre and melody, though they divide them, of course, into measures of more than common solemnity.”
17-18 Πολλὰmany, much μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore καὶand, also, even, then, next ἄλλαother, another, next περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around ὧνwho, whom, which the; oh λόγοςstatement, word , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ταὐτῷsame, he, she, it, -self διέξεισινto go through , ἐκεῖναthat δ᾽but, and, however, now ἀναγκαῖονnecessary ἐφάνηto appear, seem δεῖνit is necessary; to bind ἀναλέξασθαιto pick up, gather up , δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ὧνwho, whom, which τὰthe χαρακτηριστικὰcharacteristic τῆςthe ἐκκλησιαστικῆςecclesiastical ἀγωγῆςdeportment ὑποτίθεταιto place under . The same book contains an account of many other things, but it seemed necessary to select those facts which exhibit the characteristics of the ecclesiastical mode of life.
17-19 εἰCONJ: if, since δέbut, and, however τῳthe μὴno, not δοκεῖto think, seem τὰthe εἰρημέναto speak, talk, say ἴδιαone’s own εἶναιto be τῆςthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὸthe εὐαγγέλιονgood news, gospel πολιτείαςcitizenship , δύνασθαιto be able δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next ἄλλοιςother, another, next παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along τοὺςthe δεδηλωμένουςto make visible; to report ἁρμόττεινto fit together , πειθέσθωto persuade κἂνand if ἀπὸfrom, away from τῶνthe ἑξῆςafter, next αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same φωνῶνlanguages, voices, sounds , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to αἷςwhom ἀναμφήριστονindisputable , εἰCONJ: if, since εὐγνωμονοίηto have good sense , κομίσεταιto bring, receive τὴν‎the περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦδεthis μαρτυρίανtestimony . 17-20 γράφειto write γὰρfor, because ὧδεhere · But if any one thinks that what has been said is not peculiar to the Gospel polity, but that it can be applied to others besides those mentioned, let him be convinced by the subsequent words of the same author, in which, if he is unprejudiced, he will find undisputed testimony on this subject. Philo’s words are as follows:
17-21 ἐγκράτειανself-control δ᾽but, and, however, now ὥσπερjust as τινὰsomeone, something θεμέλιονfoundation προκαταβαλλόμενοιto throw down τῇthe ψυχῇsoul , τὰςthe ἄλλαςother, another, next ἐποικοδομοῦσινto build up ἀρετάςpraises, virtues . σιτίονgrain, dough, bread; food or, either, than; +πριν=before ποτὸνdrink (offering) οὐδεὶςno one, none, nothing ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same προσενέγκαιτοto bring to πρὸbefore ἡλίουeast, sun δύσεωςwest, setting of sun , ἐπεὶsince, because, when, after τὸthe μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. φιλοσοφεῖνto be a philospher ἄξιονworthy φωτὸςlight κρίνουσινto judge εἶναιto be , σκότουςdarkness, obscurity δὲbut, and, however τὰςthe τοῦthe σώματοςbody, corpse ἀνάγκαςnecessity · ὅθενby which, from where, from which τῷthe μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ἡμέρανday , ταῖςthe δὲbut, and, however νυκτὸςnight βραχύshort, few τιanything, something μέροςin detail, partly, one after another ἔνειμανto deal out, dispense . “Having laid down temperance as a sort of foundation in the soul, they build upon it the other virtues. None of them may take food or drink before sunset, since they regard philosophizing as a work worthy of the light, but attention to the wants of the body as proper only in the darkness, and therefore assign the day to the former, but to the latter a small portion of the night.
17-22 ἔνιοιsome δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of τριῶνthree ἡμερῶνday ὑπομιμνῄσκονταιto remember τροφῆςfood, nourishment , οἷςwho, which πλείωνmore, greater the; oh πόθοςdesire ἐπιστήμηςunderstanding ἐνίδρυταιto set in place , τινὲςsomeone, something δὲbut, and, however οὕτωςthus, so, this way ἐνευφραίνονταιto cheer, gladden καὶand, also, even, then, next τρυφῶσινto live luxuriously ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under σοφίαςwisdom ἑστιώμενοιto host a party; to be established πλουσίωςrichly, copiously, abundantly καὶand, also, even, then, next ἀφθόνωςungrudgingly τὰthe δόγματαdecree, doctrine χορηγούσηςto lead a choir , ὡςas καὶand, also, even, then, next πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with διπλασίοναduplicate χρόνονtime ἀντέχεινto hold against καὶand, also, even, then, next μόγιςhardly, scarcely, barely δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ἓξsix ἡμερῶνday ἀπογεύεσθαιto taste τροφῆςfood, nourishment ἀναγκαίαςnecessary , ἐθισθέντεςto accustom . ” But some, in whom a great desire for knowledge dwells, forget to take food for three days; and some are so delighted and feast so luxuriously upon wisdom, which furnishes doctrines richly and without stint, that they abstain even twice as long as this, and are accustomed, after six days, scarcely to take necessary food.
17-23 Ταύταςthese τοῦthe ΦίλωνοςPhilo σαφεῖςclear, plain καὶand, also, even, then, next ἀναντιρρήτουςundeniable περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῶνthe καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ἡμᾶςwe, us ὑπάρχεινto exist; possessions ἡγούμεθαto suppose λέξειςspeech, saying . These statements of Philo we regard as referring clearly and indisputably to those of our communion.
17-24 εἰCONJ: if, since δ᾽but, and, however, now ἐπὶon, upon, against τούτοιςthese ἀντιλέγωνto contradict τιςsomeone, a certain one/thing ἔτιever, any longer, yet σκληρύνοιτοto harden , καὶand, also, even, then, next οὗτοςthus, so, this ἀπαλλαττέσθωto set free τῆςthe δυσπιστίαςdisbelief , ἐναργεστέραιςmore visible πειθαρχῶνto be convinced ἀποδείξεσινproof , ἃςwho, which, that οὐno, not παρά+G=from; +D=before; +A=beside, along τισινsomeone, something or, either, than; +πριν=before μόνῃonly τῇthe ΧριστιανῶνChristians εὑρεῖνto find; broad ἔνεστινto be in κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὸthe εὐαγγέλιονgood news, gospel θρῃσκείᾳcult, religion . But if after these things any one still obstinately persists in denying the reference, let him renounce his incredulity and be convinced by yet more striking examples, which are to be found nowhere else than in the evangelical religion of the Christians.
17-25 φησὶνto affirm, say γὰρfor, because τοῖςthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around ὧνwho, whom, which the; oh λόγοςstatement, word καὶand, also, even, then, next γυναῖκαςwoman, wife συνεῖναιto come together , ὧνwho, whom, which αἱthe πλεῖσταιgreat (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) γηραλέαιaged παρθένοιvirgin τυγχάνουσινto find , τὴν‎the ἁγνείανpurity οὐκno, not ἀνάγκῃnecessity, distress , καθάπερeven as, according as ἔνιαιsome τῶνthe παρ᾽+G=from; +D=before; +A=beside, along ἝλλησινGreek ἱερειῶνpriestess, sacrifice , φυλάξασαιto guard μᾶλλονmore or, either, than; +πριν=before καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ἑκούσιονwillingly γνώμηνpurpose, decision , διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of ζῆλονzeal, ardour, jealousy καὶand, also, even, then, next πόθονlonging, yearning σοφίαςwisdom , who, which, that συμβιοῦνto live with σπουδάσασαιto be busy, eager τῶνthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὸthe σῶμαbody ἡδονῶνlusts, desires ἠλόγησανto pay no regard to , οὐno, not θνητῶνmortal ἐκγόνωνdescendant , ἀλλ᾽otherwise, however, but ἀθανάτωνdeathless ὀρεχθεῖσαιto reach, stretch , who, which, that μόνηonly, alone τίκτεινto give birth Ἀφ᾽from ἑαυτῆςherself οἵαsuch as τέand, both, also, if ἐστινto be the θεοφιλὴςbeloved of God ψυχήsoul, person . For they say that there were women also with those of whom we are speaking, and that the most of them were aged virgins who had preserved their chastity, not out of necessity, as some of the priestesses among the Greeks, but rather by their own choice, through zeal and a desire for wisdom. And that in their earnest desire to live with it as their companion they paid no attention to the pleasures of the body, seeking not mortal but immortal progeny, which only the pious soul is able to bear of itself.
17-26 εἶθ᾽then; if only! ὑποκαταβάςto descend by degrees , ἐμφαντικώτερονmore emphatically ἐκτίθεταιto set out, place outside, publish ταῦταthese (things) · “αἱthe δ᾽but, and, however, now ἐξηγήσειςa statement, narrative τῶνthe ἱερῶνholy γραμμάτωνletter γίνονταιto become, come to be αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ὑπονοιῶνsuspicion, guess ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἀλληγορίαιςallegory . ἅπασαwhole, all γὰρfor, because the νομοθεσίαgiving the law δοκεῖto think, seem τοῖςthe ἀνδράσιman, male, husband τούτοιςthese ἐοικέναιto resemble ζῴῳbeast, living thing καὶand, also, even, then, next σῶμαbody μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ἔχεινto have, hold τὰςthe ῥητὰςspoken, stated διατάξειςto appoint , ψυχὴνsoul, person δὲbut, and, however τὸνthe ἐναποκείμενονto be stored up in ταῖςthe λέξεσινspeech ἀόρατονinvisible νοῦνmind, understanding , ὃνwhom, which, that ἤρξατοto rule; to begin διαφερόντωςdifferently from the οἰκίαhouse, home αὕτηthis θεωρεῖνto look at , ὡςas διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of κατόπτρουmirror τῶνthe ὀνομάτωνname ἐξαίσιαremarkable κάλληbeauty νοημάτωνthoughts ἐμφαινόμεναto exhibit, display κατιδοῦσαto look down; to recognize . ” Then after a little he adds still more emphatically: “They expound the Sacred Scriptures figuratively by means of allegories. For the whole law seems to these men to resemble a living organism, of which the spoken words constitute the body, while the hidden sense stored up within the words constitutes the soul. This hidden meaning has first been particularly studied by this sect, which sees, revealed as in a mirror of names, the surpassing beauties of the thoughts.”
17-27 Τίwhat?, which?; +enclitic=anything, something δεῖto owe, be necessary, be needful τούτοιςthese ἐπιλέγεινto choose τὰςthe ἐπὶon, upon, against ταὐτὸνidentical συνόδουςmeeting, assembly καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰςthe ἰδίᾳone’s own μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ἀνδρῶνmale, man, husband , ἰδίᾳone’s own δὲbut, and, however γυναικῶνwife, woman ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ταὐτῷsame, he, she, it, -self διατριβὰςoccupation καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰςthe ἐξout, out of ἔθουςhabit, custom ἔτιever, any longer, yet καὶand, also, even, then, next νῦνnow; mouse πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with ἡμῶνour, of us ἐπιτελουμέναςto finish; to command ἀσκήσειςexercise , ἃςwho, which, that διαφερόντωςdifferently from κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὴν‎the τοῦthe σωτηρίουsalvation, peace offering πάθουςsuffering ἑορτὴνfeast, holy day, a festival ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἀσιτίαιςfasting καὶand, also, even, then, next διανυκτερεύσεσινnight-watching προσοχαῖςattention, care τεand, both, if τῶνthe θείωνholy λόγωνstatement, word ἐκτελεῖνto accomplish εἰώθαμενto be accustomed ; Why is it necessary to add to these things their meetings and the respective occupations of the men and of the women during those meetings, and the practices which are even to the present day habitually observed by us, especially such as we are accustomed to observe at the feast of the Saviour’s passion, with fasting and night watching and study of the divine Word?
17-28 ἅπερwho, which ἐπ᾽on, upon, against ἀκριβέστερονaccurate αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ὃνwhom, which, that καὶand, also, even, then, next εἰςinto, unto, for δεῦροcome here; until now τετήρηταιto guard, keep παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along μόνοιςonly, alone ἡμῖνus, our τρόπονway, manner, fashion ἐπισημηνάμενοςto mark, indicate the; oh δηλωθεὶςto make visible; to report ἀνὴρman, male, husband τῇthe ἰδίᾳone’s own παρέδωκενto give over, betray γραφῇscripture, writing , τὰςthe τῆςthe μεγάληςgreat (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) ἑορτῆςfeast, holy day παννυχίδαςnight-long vigil καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰςthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ταύταιςthese ἀσκήσειςexercise τούςthe τεand, both, if λέγεσθαιto speak, talk, say εἰωθόταςto be accustomed πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with ἡμῶνour, of us ὕμνουςhymn ἱστορῶνto inquire into; a wise man, judge , καὶand, also, even, then, next ὡςas ἑνὸςone, any μετὰ+G=with; +A=after ῥυθμοῦrhythm, form κοσμίωςmodestly ἐπιψάλλοντοςto pluck οἱthe λοιποὶremainder καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ἡσυχίανrest, quiet, silence ἀκροώμενοιto hearken τῶνthe ὕμνωνhymn τὰthe ἀκροτελεύτιαthe fag-end of a hymn συνεξηχοῦσινto sound forth , ὅπωςthat, because, when τεand, both, if κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὰςthe δεδηλωμέναςto make visible; to report ἡμέραςday ἐπὶon, upon, against στιβάδωνleaves χαμευνοῦντεςto lie on the ground οἴνουwine μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. τὸthe παράπανabsolutely , ὡςas αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same ῥήμασινword ἀνέγραψενto record , οὐδ᾽neither, never ἀπογεύονταιto taste, partake , ἀλλ᾽otherwise, however, but οὐδὲneither, nor, never τῶνthe ἐναίμωνmeat τινόςsomeone, something , ὕδωρwater δὲbut, and, however μόνονonly, alone αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same ἐστιto be ποτόνdrink (offering) , καὶand, also, even, then, next προσόψημαseasoning μετ᾽+G=with; +A=after ἄρτουbread ἅλεςsalt καὶand, also, even, then, next ὕσσωπονhyssop . These things the above-mentioned author has related in his own work, indicating a mode of life which has been preserved to the present time by us alone, recording especially the vigils kept in connection with the great festival, and the exercises performed during those vigils, and the hymns customarily recited by us, and describing how, while one sings regularly in time, the others listen in silence, and join in chanting only the close of the hymns; and how, on the days referred to they sleep on the ground on beds of straw, and to use his own words, taste no wine at all, nor any flesh, but water is their only drink, and the seasoning with their bread is salt and hyssop.
17-29 πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τούτοιςthese γράφειto write τὸνthe τῆςthe προστασίαςstanding in front τρόπονway, manner, fashion τῶνthe τὰςthe ἐκκλησιαστικὰςecclesiastical λειτουργίαςservice, duties, ministry ἐγκεχειρισμένωνto appoint, entrust διακονίαςservice τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰςthe ἐπὶon, upon, against πᾶσινevery, all ἀνωτάτωutmost, topmost τῆςthe ἐπισκοπῆςvisit; overseer προεδρίαςhighest ranking position . In addition to this Philo describes the order of dignities which exists among those who carry on the services of the church, mentioning the diaconate, and the office of bishop, which takes the precedence over all the others.
17-30 τούτωνthese δ᾽but, and, however, now ὅτῳanyone who πόθοςdesire ἔνεστιto be among τῆςthe ἀκριβοῦςexact, accurate ἐπιστάσεωςa halting, stopping , μάθοιto learn ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever ἐκout, out of τῆςthe δηλωθείσηςto make visible; to report τοῦthe ἀνδρὸςmale, man, husband ἱστορίαςhistory, story · But whosoever desires a more accurate knowledge of these matters may get it from the history already cited.
17-31 ὅτιbecause, for, that, since δὲbut, and, however τοὺςthe πρώτουςfirst κήρυκαςpreacher, herald τῆςthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὸthe εὐαγγέλιονgood news, gospel διδασκαλίαςteaching, instruction τάthe τεand, both, if ἀρχῆθενfrom the beginning πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle ἔθηhabit, custom παραδεδομέναto hand over καταλαβὼνto seize the; oh ΦίλωνPhilo ταῦτ᾽this ἔγραφενto write , παντίall, every, whole τῳthe δῆλονclear, evident . But that Philo, when he wrote these things, had in view the first heralds of the Gospel and the customs handed down from the beginning by the apostles, is clear to every one.

Chapter 18

18-1 ΠολύςPhilo γεindeed, doubtless, yet μὴνmonth; and yet, indeed, surely τῷthe λόγῳstatement, word, proposal καὶand, also, even, then, next πλατὺςwide, broad ταῖςthe διανοίαιςmind , ὑψηλόςhigh, lofty τεand, both, if ὢνto be καὶand, also, even, then, next μετέωροςuplifted ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ταῖςthe εἰςinto, unto, for τὰςthe θείαςdivine γραφὰςscriptures, writings θεωρίαιςsight, spectacle γεγενημένοςto become, come to be , ποικίληνvarious καὶand, also, even, then, next πολύτροπονvarious τῶνthe ἱερῶνholy λόγωνstatement, word πεποίηταιto do, make τὴν‎the ὑφήγησινguidance, leading , Copious in language, comprehensive in thought, sublime and elevated in his views of divine Scripture, Philo has produced manifold and various expositions of the sacred books.
18-2 τοῦτοthis μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. εἱρμῷsequence καὶand, also, even, then, next ἀκολουθίᾳsequence τὴν‎the τῶνthe εἰςinto, unto, for τὴν‎the ΓένεσινGenesis διεξελθὼνto go through πραγματείανwork, occupation ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to οἷςwho, which ἐπέγραψενto graze, mark the surface Νόμωνlaw ἱερῶνholy ἀλληγορίαςallegory , τοῦτοthis δὲbut, and, however κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along μέροςin detail, partly, one after another διαστολὰςcommand, order κεφαλαίωνmain point, summary, head τῶνthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ταῖςthe γραφαῖςscriptures ζητουμένωνto seek ἐπιστάσειςa halting, stopping τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next διαλύσειςseparation; to separate πεποιημένοςto do, make ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to οἷςwho, which καὶand, also, even, then, next αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same καταλλήλωςcorrespondingly Τῶνthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ΓενέσειGenesis καὶand, also, even, then, next τῶνthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἘξαγωγῇExodus Ζητημάτωνa search, question καὶand, also, even, then, next λύσεωνrelease τέθειταιto place, put τὴν‎the ἐπιγραφήνinscription . On the one hand, he expounds in order the events recorded in Genesis in the books to which he gives the title Allegories of the Sacred Laws; on the other hand, he makes successive divisions of the chapters in the Scriptures which are the subject of investigation, and gives objections and solutions, in the books which he quite suitably calls Questions and Answers on Genesis and Exodus.
18-3 ἔστιto be δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along ταῦταthese (things) προβλημάτωνa riddle; a fence τινῶνsomeone, something ἰδίωςespecially πεπονημέναto work hard σπουδάσματαsomething done eagerly , οἷάsuch as ἐστιto be τὰthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around γεωργίαςfarming, tillage δύοboth, two, double , καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around μέθηςdrunkenness τοσαῦταso great, so much , καὶand, also, even, then, next ἄλλαother, another, next ἄτταupon διαφόρουdifferent καὶand, also, even, then, next οἰκείαςrelative ἐπιγραφῆςan inscription ἠξιωμέναto think worthy , οἷοςsuch as the; oh περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around ὧνwho, whom, which νήψαςto be sober the; oh νοῦςmind εὔχεταιto pray; one who prays καὶand, also, even, then, next καταρᾶταιto curse καὶand, also, even, then, next περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around συγχύσεωςconfusion τῶνthe διαλέκτωνlanguage, dialect , καὶand, also, even, then, next the; oh περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around φυγῆςflight καὶand, also, even, then, next εὑρέσεωςa find, discovery , καὶand, also, even, then, next the; oh περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῆςthe πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τὰthe παιδεύματαlesson, what is taught συνόδουmeeting, assembly , περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τεand, both, if τοῦthe τίςwho?, what? Why?; +enclitic=someone, something the; oh τῶνthe θείωνholy ἐστὶto be κληρονόμοςheir or, either, than; +πριν=before περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῆςthe εἰςinto, unto, for τὰthe ἴσαequal amounts καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐναντίαcontrary, opposite τομῆςpruning , καὶand, also, even, then, next ἔτιever, any longer, yet τὸthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῶνthe τριῶνthree ἀρετῶνvirtue ἃςwho, which, that σὺν+D=with ἄλλαιςother ἀνέγραψενto record ΜωυσῆςMoses , There are, besides these, treatises expressly worked out by him on certain subjects, such as the two books on Agriculture, and the same number on Drunkenness; and some others distinguished by different titles corresponding to the contents of each; for instance, Concerning the Things Which the Sober Mind Desires and Execrates, on the Confusion of Tongues, on Flight and Discovery, on Assembly for the Sake of Instruction, on the Question, 'Who is Heir to Things Divine?' or on the Division of Things into Equal and Unequal, and still further the work on the Three Virtues Which with Others Have Been Described by Moses.
18-4 πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τούτοιςthese the; oh περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῶνthe μετονομαζομένωνto call by a new name καὶand, also, even, then, next ὧνwho, whom, which ἕνεκαfor sake of, because μετονομάζονταιto call by a new name , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to who, which, that φησιto affirm, say συντεταχέναιto put in order together καὶand, also, even, then, next περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around διαθηκῶνcovenant α'1, first β'2, second · In addition to these is the work on Those Whose Names Have Been Changed and Why They Have Been Changed, in which he says that he had written also two books on Covenants: First and Second.
18-5 ἔστινto be δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same καὶand, also, even, then, next περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around ἀποικίαςexiled settlement, removal καὶand, also, even, then, next βίουlife, livelihood σοφοῦwise τοῦthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along δικαιοσύνηνrighteousness τελειωθέντοςto finish, complete or, either, than; +πριν=before νόμωνlaw ἀγράφωνunwritten , καὶand, also, even, then, next ἔτιever, any longer, yet περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around γιγάντωνgiant or, either, than; +πριν=before περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe μὴno, not τρέπεσθαιto turn, shift τὸthe θεῖονdivine, sulphur, godhead , περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τεand, both, if τοῦthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΜωυσέαMoses θεοπέμπτουςsent by the gods εἶναιto be τοὺςthe ὀνείρουςa dream α'1, first β'2, second γ'3, third δ'4, fourth ε'5, fifth . And there is also a work of his on Emigration, and one on the Life of a Wise Man Made Perfect in Righteousness, or on Unwritten Laws; and still further the work on Giants or on the Immutability of God, and a first, second, third, fourth and fifth book on the Proposition, That Dreams According to Moses are Sent by God: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Fifth.
18-6 καὶand, also, even, then, next ταῦταthese (things) μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. τὰthe εἰςinto, unto, for ἡμᾶςwe, us ἐλθόνταto come, go τῶνthe εἰςinto, unto, for τὴν‎the ΓένεσινGenesis , These are the books on Genesis that have come down to us.
18-7 εἰςinto, unto, for δὲbut, and, however τὴν‎the ἜξοδονExodus ἔγνωμενto know αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same Ζητημάτωνa search, question καὶand, also, even, then, next λύσεωνrelease α'1, first β'2, second ’γ3, third δ'4, fourth ε'5, fifth , καὶand, also, even, then, next τὸthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῆςthe σκηνῆςtabernacle, tent , τόthe τεand, both, if περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῶνthe δέκαten λογίωνoracle, sayings , καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῶνthe ἀναφερομένωνto bring, carry up, offer ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to εἴδειform, appearance νόμωνlaw εἰςinto, unto, for τὰthe συντείνονταto draw tight, strain κεφάλαιαmain point, summary τῶνthe δέκαten λόγωνstatement, word α'1, first β'2, second γ'3, third δ'4, fourth , καὶand, also, even, then, next τὸthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῶνthe εἰςinto, unto, for τὰςthe ἱερουργίαςreligious service ζῴωνbeast, living thing καὶand, also, even, then, next τίναwho? what? τὰthe τῶνthe θυσιῶνsacrifice εἴδηappearance , καὶand, also, even, then, next τὸthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῶνthe προκειμένωνto lie in front of ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῷthe νόμῳlaw τοῖςthe μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ἀγαθοῖςgood ἄθλωνthe prize of contest , τοῖςthe δὲbut, and, however πονηροῖςevil, wicked ἐπιτιμίωνpunishment, penalty καὶand, also, even, then, next . But on Exodus we are acquainted with the first, second, third, fourth and fifth books of Questions and Answers; also with that on the Tabernacle, and that on the Ten Commandments, and the four books on the Laws Which Refer Especially to the Principal Divisions of the Ten Commandments, and another on Animals Intended for Sacrifice and on the Kinds of Sacrifice, and another on the Rewards Fixed in the Law for the Good, and on the Punishments and Curses Fixed for the Wicked.
18-8 πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τούτοιςthese ἅπασινall καὶand, also, even, then, next μονόβιβλαsingle volume αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same φέρεταιto bear, carry, endure ὡςas τὸthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around προνοίαςforesight , καὶand, also, even, then, next the; oh περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same συνταχθεὶςto put in order together λόγοςstatement, word , καὶand, also, even, then, next the; oh Πολιτικόςpolitical , ἔτιever, any longer, yet τεand, both, if the; oh ἈλέξανδροςAlexander or, either, than; +πριν=before περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe λόγονstatement, word ἔχεινto have, hold τὰthe ἄλογαwithout speech ζῷαliving creature , ἐπὶon, upon, against τούτοιςthese the; oh περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe δοῦλονsubject, servant, slave εἶναιto be πάνταevery, all φαῦλονwicked, evil , who, which, that ἑξῆςafter, next ἐστινto be the; oh περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe πάνταevery, all σπουδαῖονprompt, diligent ἐλεύθερονfree εἶναιto be · In addition to all these there are extant also some single-volumed works of his; as for instance, the work on Providence, and the book composed by him on the Jews, and the Statesman; and still further, Alexander, or on the Possession of Reason by the Irrational Animals. Besides these there is a work on the Proposition that Every Wicked Man is a Slave, to which is subjoined the work on the Proposition that Every Good Man is Free.
18-9 μετ᾽+G=with; +A=after οὓςwho, which, that συντέτακταιto instruct αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same the; oh περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around βίουlife, livelihood θεωρητικοῦable to perceive or, either, than; +πριν=before ἱκετῶνsuppliant , ἐξout, out of οὗwhere; who, which, that τὰthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe βίουlife, livelihood τῶνthe ἀποστολικῶνapostolic ἀνδρῶνmale, man, husband διεληλύθαμενto go through , καὶand, also, even, then, next τῶνthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to νόμῳlaw δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next προφήταιςprophet ἙβραϊκῶνHebrews ὀνομάτωνname αἱthe ἑρμηνεῖαιinterpretation τοῦthe αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same σπουδὴspeed, zeal, haste εἶναιto be λέγονταιto say, pick up, lay . After these was composed by him the work on the Contemplative Life, or on Suppliants, from which we have drawn the facts concerning the life of the apostolic men; and still further, the Interpretation of the Hebrew Names in the Law and in the Prophets are said to be the result of his industry.
18-10 οὗτοςthus, so, this μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΓάϊονGaius, Caius ἐπὶon, upon, against τῆςthe ῬώμηςRome ἀφικόμενοςto arrive at , τὰthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῆςthe ΓαΐουCaius, Gaius θεοστυγίαςhatred of God αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same γραφένταto write , who, which, that μετὰ+G=with; +A=after ἤθουςdealings, business καὶand, also, even, then, next εἰρωνείαςhypocrisy περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around ἀρετῶνvirtue ἐπέγραψενto graze, mark the surface , ἐπὶon, upon, against πάσηςall, utter, complete λέγεταιto speak, talk, say τῆςthe ῬωμαίωνRoman, Latin συγκλήτουsummoned κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΚλαύδιονClaudius διελθεῖνto go through , ὡςas καὶand, also, even, then, next τῆςthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to βιβλιοθήκαιςlibrary ἀναθέσεωςdedicating θαυμασθένταςto wonder αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same καταξιωθῆναιto consider worthy τοὺςthe λόγουςstatement, word . And he is said to have read in the presence of the whole Roman Senate during the reign of Claudius the work which he had written, when he came to Rome under Caius, concerning Caius' hatred of the gods, and to which, with ironical reference to its character, he had given the title on the Virtues. And his discourses were so much admired as to be deemed worthy of a place in the libraries.
18-11 Κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along δὲbut, and, however τούσδεthis τοὺςthe χρόνουςtime ΠαύλουPaul, Paulus τὴν‎the ἀπὸfrom, away from ἹερουσαλὴμJerusalem καὶand, also, even, then, next κύκλῳvault (of heaven), circuit, all around πορείανjourneying μέχριuntil, unto, as far as τοῦthe ἸλλυρικοῦIllyricum διανύοντοςto finish , ἸουδαίουςJews ῬώμηςRome ἀπελαύνειto drive away, expel from ΚλαύδιοςClaudius , who, which, that; +enclitic=the τεand, both, if ἈκύλαςAquila καὶand, also, even, then, next ΠρίσκιλλαPriscilla μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τῶνthe ἄλλωνother ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews τῆςthe ῬώμηςRome ἀπαλλαγέντεςto set free ἐπὶon, upon, against τὴν‎the ἈσίανAsia καταίρουσινto take down; to devote , ἐνταῦθάhere, in this place; soon τεand, both, if ΠαύλῳPaul τῷthe ἀποστόλῳapostle συνδιατρίβουσινto spend time with , τοὺςthe αὐτόθιhere, in this place τῶνthe ἐκκλησιῶνchurch, assembly ἄρτιimmediately, now, here, at once πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same καταβληθένταςto overthrow θεμελίουςfoundation, wall ἐπιστηρίζοντιto lean on . διδάσκαλοςteacher καὶand, also, even, then, next τούτωνthese the ἱερὰsacred things τῶνthe ΠράξεωνActs γραφήscripture . At this time, while Paul was completing his journey from Jerusalem and around unto Illyricum,1Claudius drove the Jews out of Rome; and Aquila and Priscilla, leaving Rome with the other Jews, came to Asia, and there abode with the apostle Paul, who was confirming the churches of that region whose foundations he had newly laid. The sacred book of the Acts informs us also of these things.

Chapter 19

19-1 Ἔτιagain, same δὲbut, and, however ΚλαυδίουClaudius τὰthe τῆςthe βασιλείαςroyalty, kingdom, queen διέποντοςto manage , κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὴν‎the τοῦthe πάσχαpassover ἑορτὴνfeast, holy day, a festival τοσαύτηνso great, so much ἐπὶon, upon, against τῶνthe ἹεροσολύμωνJerusalem στάσινplace, position, strife καὶand, also, even, then, next ταραχὴνtrouble, tumult ἐγγενέσθαιto be born in συνέβηto happen, occur, go with , ὡςas μόνωνonly, alone τῶνthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὰςthe ἐξόδουςexit, way out τοῦthe ἱεροῦtemple βίᾳforce, violence συνωθουμένωνto force together τρεῖςthree μυριάδας10,000 ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews ἀποθανεῖνto die πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with ἀλλήλωνone another, each other καταπατηθέντωνto trample underfoot , γενέσθαιto become, come to be τεand, both, if τὴν‎the ἑορτὴνfeast, holy day, a festival πένθοςsorrow μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ὅλῳwhole τῷthe ἔθνειnation, gentile , θρῆνονlamentation δὲbut, and, however καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ἑκάστηνeach οἰκίανhouse, home . While Claudius was still emperor, it happened that so great a tumult and disturbance took place in Jerusalem at the feast of the Passover, that thirty thousand of those Jews alone who were forcibly crowded together at the gate of the temple perished, being trampled under foot by one another. Thus the festival became a season of mourning for all the nation, and there was weeping in every house.
19-2 καὶand, also, even, then, next ταῦταthese (things) δὲbut, and, however κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along λέξινspeech the; oh ἸώσηποςJosephus, Joseph . These things are related literally by Josephus.
19-3 ΚλαύδιοςClaudius δὲbut, and, however ἈγρίππανAgrippa , ἈγρίππουAgrippa παῖδαchild, servant , ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews καθίστησιto set down βασιλέαking , ΦήλικαFelix τῆςthe χώραςcountry ἁπάσηςall, whole ΣαμαρείαςSamaria τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next ΓαλιλαίαςGalilee καὶand, also, even, then, next προσέτιbesides τῆςthe ἐπικαλουμένηςto invoke, call upon ΠεραίαςPerea ἐπίτροπονguardian ἐκπέμψαςto send out , διοικήσαςto manage house/life δὲbut, and, however αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same τὴν‎the ἡγεμονίανregiment, company, headquarters ἔτεσινyear τρισὶνthree καὶand, also, even, then, next δέκαten πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with μησὶνmonth ὀκτώeight , ΝέρωναNero τῆςthe ἀρχῆςbeginning; ruler διάδοχονa successor καταλιπώνto leave , τελευτᾷto end, die . But Claudius appointed Agrippa, son of Agrippa, king of the Jews, having sent Felix as procurator of the whole country of Samaria and Galilee, and of the land called Perea. And after he had reigned thirteen years and eight months he died, and left Nero as his successor in the empire.

Chapter 20

20-1 Κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along δὲbut, and, however ΝέρωναNero , ΦήλικοςFēlix τῆςthe ἸουδαίαςJudaea ἐπιτροπεύοντοςto be a trustee; to govern , αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same ῥήμασινword αὖθιςback again the; oh ἸώσηποςJosephus, Joseph τὴν‎the εἰςinto, unto, for ἀλλήλουςone another, each other τῶνthe ἱερέωνpriest στάσινplace, position, strife ὧδέhere, hither, there, thus πωςperhaps, somehow, something like ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to εἰκοστῷtwentieth τῆςthe Ἀρχαιολογίαςancient history γράφειto write · Josephus again, in the twentieth book of his Antiquities, relates the quarrel which arose among the priests during the reign of Nero, while Felix was procurator of Judea. His words are as follows :
20-2 Ἐξάπτεταιto fasten from δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next τοῖςthe ἀρχιερεῦσιchief priests στάσιςposition, existence, revolt πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τοὺςthe ἱερεῖςpriest καὶand, also, even, then, next τοὺςthe πρώτουςfirst τοῦthe πλήθουςcrowd, number, multitude τῶνthe ἹεροσολύμωνJerusalem , “There arose a quarrel between the high priests on the one hand and the priests and leaders of the people of Jerusalem on the other.
20-3 ἕκαστόςeach τεand, both, if αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same στῖφοςcompact body of men ἀνθρώπωνhuman, man τῶνthe θρασυτάτωνboldest καὶand, also, even, then, next νεωτεριστῶνinnovator ἑαυτῷhimself, herself, itself ποιήσαςto do, make , ἡγεμὼνgovernor, chief, prince ἦνto be , καὶand, also, even, then, next συρράσσοντεςto dash together, fight with ἐκακολόγουνto curse, revile τεand, both, if ἀλλήλουςone another, each other καὶand, also, even, then, next λίθοιςstone ἔβαλλονto throw, send, put · And each of them collected a body of the boldest and most restless men, and put himself at their head, and whenever they met they hurled invectives and stones at each other.
20-4 the; oh δ᾽but, and, however, now ἐπιπλήξωνto strike ἦνto be οὐδὲneither, nor, never εἷςone , ἀλλ᾽otherwise, however, but ὡςas ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἀπροστατήτῳwithout design or purpose, spontaneous πόλειcity ταῦτ᾽this ἐπράσσετοto pass through, pass over μετ᾽+G=with; +A=after ἐξουσίαςauthority . And there was no one that would interpose; but these things were done at will as if in a city destitute of a ruler.
20-5 τοσαύτηso great, so much δὲbut, and, however τοὺςthe ἀρχιερεῖςchief priest, high priest κατέλαβενto pull down, attain, overtake ἀναίδειαshamelessness καὶand, also, even, then, next τόλμαcourage, daring , ὥστεtherefore, so that, in order that ἐκπέμπεινto send out δούλουςsubject, servant, slave ἐτόλμωνto undertake ἐπὶon, upon, against τὰςthe ἅλωναςthreshing floor τοὺςthe ληψομένουςto take, receive τὰςthe τοῖςthe ἱερεῦσινpriest ὀφειλομέναςto owe δεκάταςtenth . καὶand, also, even, then, next συνέβαινεto meet τοὺςthe ἀπορουμένουςto worry τῶνthe ἱερέωνpriest ὑπ᾽+ G = by (agency); + A = under ἐνδείαςneed, lack ἀπολλυμένουςto perish θεωρεῖνto look at · And so great was the shamelessness and audacity of the high priests that they dared to send their servants to the threshing-floors to seize the tithes due to the priests; and thus those of the priests that were poor were seen to be perishing of want.
20-6 οὕτωςthus, so, this way ἐκράτειto be strong, to grasp τοῦthe δικαίουrighteous παντὸςevery, all the τῶνthe στασιαζόντωνto rebel βίαforce . ” In this way did the violence of the factions prevail over all justice.
20-7 Πάλινagain δὲbut, and, however the; oh αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same συγγραφεὺςwriter κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τοὺςthe αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same χρόνουςtime ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἹεροσολύμοιςJerusalem ὑποφυῆναιto make to grow up λῃστῶνrobbers τιanything, something εἶδοςform, shape, appearance ἱστορεῖto inquire into; record , οἳwho, which, that μετ᾽+G=with; +A=after ἡμέρανday , ὥςas, so φησινto affirm, say , καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to μέσῃmiddle τῇthe πόλειcity ἐφόνευονto murder, kill τοὺςthe συναντῶνταςto meet face-to-face . And the same author again relates that about the same time there sprang up in Jerusalem a certain kind of robbers, who by day, as he says, and in the middle of the city slew those who met them.
20-8 μάλισταespecially, most of all, particularly γὰρfor, because ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ταῖςthe ἑορταῖςfeast, holy day μιγνυμένουςto mix τῷthe πλήθειmultitude; great number καὶand, also, even, then, next ταῖςthe ἐσθήσεσινclothing ὑποκρύπτονταςto hide under μικρὰsmall, few ξιφίδιαdagger , τούτοιςthese νύττεινto prick τοὺςthe διαφόρουςdifferent · For, especially at the feasts, they mingled with the multitude, and with short swords, which they concealed under their garments, they stabbed the most distinguished men.
20-9 ἔπειταafterward, then, next πεσόντωνto fall down , μέροςin detail, partly, one after another γίνεσθαιto become, come to be τῶνthe ἐπαγανακτούντωνto be indignant αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same τοὺςthe πεφονευκόταςto murder, kill · And when they fell, the murderers themselves were among those who expressed their indignation.
20-10 διὸtherefore καὶand, also, even, then, next παντάπασινaltogether ὑπ᾽+ G = by (agency); + A = under ἀξιοπιστίαςtrustworthiness ἀνευρέτουςundiscovered γενέσθαιto become, come to be . And thus on account of the confidence which was reposed in them by all, they remained undiscovered.
20-11 πρῶτονfirst, before μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ὑπ᾽+ G = by (agency); + A = under αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same ἸωνάθηνJonathan τὸνthe ἀρχιερέαchief priest, high priest κατασφαγῆναιto slaughter, murder , μετὰ+G=with; +A=after δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ἡμέρανday ἀναιρεῖσθαιto take away, destroy πολλούςmany, much , καὶand, also, even, then, next τῶνthe συμφορῶνinjury, encounter τὸνthe φόβονfright, fear εἶναιto be χαλεπώτερονmore difficult , ἑκάστουeach καθάπερeven as, according as ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to πολέμῳwar καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ὥρανhour τὸνthe θάνατονdeath προσδεχομένουto take up, receive . The first that was slain by them was Jonathan the high priest; and after him many were killed every day, until the fear became worse than the evil itself, each one, as in battle, hourly expecting death.

Chapter 21

21-1 Ἑξῆςnext δὲbut, and, however τούτοιςthese ἐπιφέρειto bring, grant μετ᾽+G=with; +A=after ἕτεραother, another, next, else λέγωνto speak, talk, say · After other matters he proceeds as follows:
21-2 μείζονιgreater (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) δὲbut, and, however τούτωνthese πληγῇplague ἸουδαίουςJews ἐκάκωσενto afflict the; oh ΑἰγύπτιοςEgyptian ψευδοπροφήτηςfalse prophet . But the Jews were afflicted with a greater plague than these by the Egyptian false prophet.
21-3 παραγενόμενοςto come to, arrive γὰρfor, because εἰςinto, unto, for τὴν‎the χώρανcountry ἄνθρωποςman, mankind γόηςsorcerer καὶand, also, even, then, next προφήτουprophet πίστινtrust, faith, belief ἐπιθεὶςto lay upon, place upon, put on ἑαυτῷhimself, herself, itself , περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τρισμυρίους30,000 μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ἀθροίζειto collect τῶνthe ἠπατημένωνto cheat, deceive , περιαγαγὼνto lead around δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτοὺςhe, she, it, -self, same ἐκout, out of τῆςthe ἐρημίαςwilderness εἰςinto, unto, for τὸthe ἐλαιῶνolivet, olives καλούμενονto call, name ὄροςmountain , ἐκεῖθενfrom there οἷόςsuch as τεand, both, if ἦνto be εἰςinto, unto, for ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem παρελθεῖνto proceed, go, depart βιάζεσθαιto apply force καὶand, also, even, then, next κρατήσαςto be strong τῆςthe τεand, both, if ῬωμαϊκῆςLatin, Roman φρουρᾶςa guard καὶand, also, even, then, next τοῦthe δήμουpeople τυραννικῶςroyally, governmentally χρώμενοςto use, employ τοῖςthe συνεισπεσοῦσινto rush in along with δορυφόροιςguard . For there appeared in the land an impostor who aroused faith in himself as a prophet, and collected about thirty thousand of those whom he had deceived, and led them from the desert to the so-called Mount of Olives whence he was prepared to enter Jerusalem by force and to overpower the Roman garrison and seize the government of the people, using those who made the attack with him as body guards.
21-4 φθάνειto come, arrive δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same τὴν‎the ὁρμὴνimpulse ΦῆλιξFelix , ὑπαντιάσαςto come to meet μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τῶνthe ῬωμαϊκῶνRoman ὁπλιτῶνarmed warrior , καὶand, also, even, then, next πᾶςevery, all the; oh δῆμοςpeople συνεφήψατοto join in attacking τῆςthe ἀμύνηςself-defence , ὥστεtherefore, so that, in order that συμβολῆςmeeting γενομένηςto become, come to be τὸνthe μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ΑἰγύπτιονEgyptian φυγεῖνto flee, escape μετ᾽+G=with; +A=after ὀλίγωνfew, small , διαφθαρῆναιto destroy utterly δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next ζωγρηθῆναιto save alive; to revive πλείστουgreatest τῶνthe σὺν+D=with αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same . ” But Felix anticipated his attack, and went out to meet him with the Roman legionaries, and all the people joined in the defence, so that when the battle was fought the Egyptian fled with a few followers, but the most of them were destroyed or taken captive.”
21-5 Ταῦταthese (things) ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe δευτέρᾳsecond, again (Monday) τῶνthe ἹστοριῶνHistory the; oh ἸώσηποςJosephus, Joseph · Josephus relates these events in the second book of his History.
21-6 ἐπιστῆσαιto give attention δὲbut, and, however ἄξιονworthy τοῖςthe ἐνταῦθαhere, in this place κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὸνthe ΑἰγύπτιονEgyptian δεδηλωμένοιςto make visible; to report καὶand, also, even, then, next τοῖςthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ταῖςthe ΠράξεσιActs τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle , But it is worth while comparing the account of the Egyptian given here with that contained in the Acts of the Apostles.
21-7 ἔνθαthen, there κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΦήλικαFelix πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τοῦthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἹεροσολύμοιςJerusalem χιλιάρχουcommander of 1000 εἴρηταιto speak, talk, say τῷthe ΠαύλῳPaul , ὁπηνίκαsince, when κατεστασίαζενto riot against αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same τὸthe τῶνthe ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews πλῆθοςlarge crowd · “οὐκno, not ἄραthen, therefore, perhaps σὺyou εἶto be the; oh ΑἰγύπτιοςEgyptian the; oh πρὸbefore τούτωνthese τῶνthe ἡμερῶνday ἀναστατώσαςto trouble καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐξαγαγὼνto bring out, lead out ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe ἐρήμῳwilderness τοὺςthe τετρακισχιλίουςfour thousand ἄνδραςman τῶνthe σικαρίωνassassin ;”1 In the time of Felix it was said to Paul by the centurion in Jerusalem, when the multitude of the Jews raised a disturbance against the apostle, “Are you not he who before these days made an uproar, and led out into the wilderness four thousand men that were murderers1?”2
1The Sicarii were the special group of revolutionaries in Jerusalem who pracstised the assassination of their opponents by means of a short dagger or sica which could be conveniently concealed in the sleeve. See chapter 20, verse 8 .
2Acts 21:38
21-8 ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but τὰthe μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΦήλικαFelix τοιαῦταof such kind . These are the events which took place in the time of Felix.

Chapter 22

22-1 Τούτουthis δὲbut, and, however ΦῆστοςFēstus ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under ΝέρωνοςNero διάδοχοςsuccessor, deputy πέμπεταιto send , Festus was sent by Nero to be Felix’s successor.
22-2 καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ὃνwhom, which, that δικαιολογησάμενοςto plead a legal case the; oh ΠαῦλοςPaul δέσμιοςprisoner ἐπὶon, upon, against ῬώμηςRome ἄγεταιto lead, bring · Under him Paul, having made his defence, was sent bound to Rome.
22-3 ἈρίσταρχοςAristarchus αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same συνῆνto be with , ὃνwhom, which, that καὶand, also, even, then, next εἰκότωςexpectedly συναιχμάλωτόνfellow prisoner πουabout; where? τῶνthe ἐπιστολῶνepistle, letter ἀποκαλεῖto recall . Aristarchus was with him, whom he also somewhere in his epistles quite naturally calls his fellow-prisoner.1
22-4 καὶand, also, even, then, next ΛουκᾶςLuke , the; oh καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰςthe πράξειςaction, act, deed, practice τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle γραφῇscripture, writing παραδούςto give over , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τούτοιςthese κατέλυσεto destroy; to rest τὴν‎the ἱστορίανhistory, story, account , διετίανtwo years ὅληνall, whole ἐπὶon, upon, against τῆςthe ῬώμηςRome τὸνthe ΠαῦλονPaul ἄνετονreleased διατρῖψαιto reside, stay, rub καὶand, also, even, then, next τὸνthe τοῦthe ΘεοῦGod λόγονstatement, word ἀκωλύτωςfreely κηρῦξαιto herald ἐπισημηνάμενοςto mark, indicate . and Luke, who wrote the Acts of the Apostles, brought his history to a close at this point, after stating that Paul spent two whole years at Rome as a prisoner at large, and preached the word of God without restraint.
22-5 τότεthen μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ἀπολογησάμενονto defend oneself , αὖθιςback again ἐπὶon, upon, against τὴν‎the τοῦthe κηρύγματοςproclamation διακονίανservice λόγοςstatement, word ἔχειto have, hold στείλασθαιto make ready τὸνthe ἀπόστολονapostle , Δεύτερονsecond δ᾽but, and, however, now ἐπιβάνταto go upon τῇthe αὐτῇhe, she, it, -self, same πόλειcity τῷthe κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same τελειωθῆναιto complete μαρτυρίῳproof, witness · Thus after he had made his defence it is said that the apostle was sent again upon the ministry of preaching, and that upon coming to the same city a second time he suffered martyrdom.
22-6 ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to who, which, that δεσμοῖςchains, bonds ἐχόμενοςto have, hold , τὴν‎the πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with ΤιμόθεονTimothy δευτέρανsecond ἐπιστολὴνepistle, letter συντάττειto put in order together , ὁμοῦtogether σημαίνωνto signify τὴν‎the τεand, both, if προτέρανformer, previous αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same γενομένηνto become, come to be ἀπολογίανdefence καὶand, also, even, then, next τὴν‎the παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along πόδαςfoot τελείωσινto accomplish . In this imprisonment he wrote his second epistle to Timothy, in which he mentions his first defence and his impending death.
22-7 δέχουto take, receive δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore καὶand, also, even, then, next τούτωνthese τὰςthe αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same μαρτυρίαςwitness · “ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe πρώτῃfirst μουmy, of me , ” φησίνto affirm, say , “ἀπολογίᾳdefence οὐδείςno one, none, nothing μοιme, my παρεγένετοto come to, arrive , ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but πάντεςevery, all μεme ἐγκατέλιπονto leave behind, neglect, forsake, leaveμὴno, not αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same λογισθείηto consider, think ), the; oh δὲbut, and, however κύριόςlord μοιme, my παρέστηto stand beside καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐνεδυνάμωσένto strengthen μεme , ἵναin order that, so that δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ἐμοῦme, my, mine τὸthe Κήρυγμαpreaching, proclamation πληροφορηθῇto fill καὶand, also, even, then, next ἀκούσωσιto hear πάνταevery, all τὰthe ἔθνηgentile, nation , καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐρρύσθηνto rescue ἐκout, out of στόματοςmouth λέοντοςlion .” But hear his testimony on these matters: “At my first answer,” he says, “no man stood with me, but all men forsook me: I pray God that it may not be laid to their charge. Notwithstanding the Lord stood with me, and strengthened me; that by me the preaching might be fully known, and that all the Gentiles might hear: and I was delivered out of the mouth of the lion.”1
22-8 σαφῶςclearly δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore παρίστησινto stand beside διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of τούτωνthese ὅτιbecause, for, that, since δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore τὸthe πρότερονbefore, previous , ὡςas ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever τὸthe Κήρυγμαpreaching, proclamation τὸthe δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same πληρωθείηto make full , ἐρρύσθηto rescue ἐκout, out of στόματοςmouth λέοντοςlion , τὸνthe ΝέρωναNero ταύτῃthis , ὡςas ἔοικενto be like , διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of τὸthe ὠμόθυμονsavage-hearted προσειπώνto speak to . He plainly indicates in these words that on the former occasion, in order that the preaching might be fulfilled by him, he was rescued from the mouth of the lion, referring, in this expression, to Nero, as is probable on account of the latter’s cruelty.
22-9 οὔκουνcertainly not; then ἑξῆςafter, next προστέθεικενto put to παραπλήσιόνresembling τιanything, something τῷtheῥύσεταίto rescue, save μεme ἐκout, out of στόματοςmouth λέοντοςlion · ” ἑώραto see γὰρfor, because τῷthe πνεύματιspirit, breath, wind τὴν‎the ὅσονas long, as much, all οὔπωnot yet μέλλουσανto intend, be about to αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same τελευτήνend, death, limit , He did not therefore afterward add the similar statement, He will rescue me from the mouth of the lion; for he saw in the spirit that his end would not be long delayed.
22-10 δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of who, which, that; +enclitic=the φησινto affirm, say ἐπιλέγωνto choose τῷtheκαὶand, also, even, then, next ἐρρύσθηνto rescue ἐκout, out of στόματοςmouth λέοντοςlionτὸtheῥύσεταίto rescue, save μεme the; oh κύριοςlord ἀπὸfrom, away from παντὸςevery, all ἔργουwork, deed πονηροῦwicked, evil καὶand, also, even, then, next σώσειto save εἰςinto, unto, for τὴν‎the βασιλείανroyalty, rule, kingdom αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same τὴν‎the ἐπουράνιονcelestial , ” σημαίνωνto signify τὸthe παραυτίκαmomentary μαρτύριονto witness, give evidence · who, which, that καὶand, also, even, then, next σαφέστερονclearer, clearest ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῇthe αὐτῇhe, she, it, -self, same προλέγειto predict γραφῇscripture, writing , φάσκωνto stateἐγὼI γὰρfor, because ἤδηnow, already σπένδομαιto offer, devote , καὶand, also, even, then, next the; oh καιρὸςseason, time τῆςthe ἐμῆςme, my ἀναλύσεωςdeparture ἐφέστηκενto set up, erect . ” Wherefore he adds to the words, and he delivered me from the mouth of the lion, this sentence: the Lord shall deliver me from every evil work, and will preserve me unto his heavenly kingdom,1indicating his speedy martyrdom; which he also foretells still more clearly in the same epistle, when he writes, for I am now ready to be offered, and the time of my departure is at hand.
22-11 νῦνnow; mouse μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ἐπὶon, upon, against τῆςthe δευτέραςsecond ἐπιστολῆςepistle, letter τῶνthe πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with ΤιμόθεονTimothy τὸνthe ΛουκᾶνLuke μόνονonly, alone γράφοντιto write αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same συνεῖναιto come together δηλοῖto indicate, signify , κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along δὲbut, and, however τὴν‎the προτέρανformer, previous ἀπολογίανdefence οὐδὲneither, nor, never τοῦτονthis · ὅθενby which, from where, from which εἰκότωςexpectedly τὰςthe τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle ΠράξειςActs ἐπ᾽on, upon, against ἐκεῖνονthat the; oh ΛουκᾶςLuke περιέγραψεto mark around τὸνthe χρόνονtime , τὴν‎the μέχριςuntil, unto ὅτεafter that, when, while τῷthe ΠαύλῳPaul συνῆνto be with ἱστορίανhistory, story, account ὑφηγησάμενοςto go just before, guide, lead . In his second epistle to Timothy, moreover, he indicates that Luke was with him when he wrote, but at his first defence not even he. Whence it is probable that Luke wrote the Acts of the Apostles at that time, continuing his history down to the period when he was with Paul.
22-12 ταῦταthese (things) δ᾽but, and, however, now ἡμῖνus, our εἴρηταιto speak, talk, say παρισταμένοιςto stand beside ὅτιbecause, for, that, since μὴno, not καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ἣνwho, which, that the; oh ΛουκᾶςLuke ἀνέγραψενto record ἐπὶon, upon, against τῆςthe ῬώμηςRome ἐπιδημίανa sojourn, stay τοῦthe ΠαύλουPaul, Paulus τὸthe μαρτύριονto witness, give evidence αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same συνεπεράνθηto accomplish jointly · But these things have been adduced by us to show that Paul’s martyrdom did not take place at the time of that Roman sojourn which Luke records.
22-13 εἰκόςreasonable γέyet, doubtless, indeed, also τοιand yet, surely κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ἀρχὰςbeginning; ruler ἠπιώτερονmore gentle, kinder τοῦthe ΝέρωνοςNero διακειμένουto serve at table , ῥᾷονeasier τὴν‎the ὑπὲρ+ GEN = in behalf of, instead of; + ACC = over, above, beyond τοῦthe δόγματοςdecree, doctrine τοῦthe ΠαύλουPaul, Paulus καταδεχθῆναιto receive, admit; to discover ἀπολογίανdefence , προελθόντοςto advance δ᾽but, and, however, now εἰςinto, unto, for ἀθεμίτουςunlawful τόλμαςaudacity , μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τῶνthe ἄλλωνother καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle ἐγχειρηθῆναιto attempt . It is probable indeed that as Nero was more disposed to mildness in the beginning, Paul’s defence of his doctrine was more easily received; but that when he had advanced to the commission of lawless deeds of daring, he made the apostles as well as others the subjects of his attacks.

Chapter 23

23-1 ἸουδαῖοίJews γεindeed, doubtless, yet μὴνmonth; and yet, indeed, surely τοῦthe ΠαύλουPaul, Paulus ΚαίσαραCaesar ἐπικαλεσαμένουto call upon, summon ἐπίon, upon, against τεand, both, if τὴν‎the ῬωμαίωνRoman, Latin πόλινcity ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under ΦήστουFestus παραπεμφθέντοςto send past , τῆςthe ἐλπίδοςhope καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ἣνwho, which, that ἐξήρτυονto get ready αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same τὴν‎the ἐπιβουλήνplot , ἀποπεσόντεςto fall off from , ἐπὶon, upon, against ἸάκωβονJames, Jacob τὸνthe τοῦthe κυρίουlord τρέπονταιto turn, incline ἀδελφόνbrother , who, which, that πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle the; oh τῆςthe ἐπισκοπῆςvisit; overseer τῆςthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἹεροσολύμοιςJerusalem ἐγκεχείριστοto entrust θρόνοςthrone, seat . But after Paul, in consequence of his appeal to Caesar, had been sent to Rome by Festus, the Jews, being frustrated in their hope of entrapping him by the snares which they had laid for him, turned against James, the brother of the Lord, to whom the episcopal seat at Jerusalem had been entrusted by the apostles.
23-2 τοιαῦταof such kind δὲbut, and, however αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τούτουthis τολμᾶταιto undertake (a task) . The following daring measures were undertaken by them against him.
23-3 εἰςinto, unto, for μέσονmiddle, midst, with ἀνά=between αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἀγαγόντεςto lead, bring ἄρνησινto deny τῆςthe εἰςinto, unto, for τὸνthe ΧριστὸνChrist πίστεωςtrust, faith, belief ἐπὶon, upon, against παντὸςevery, all ἐξῄτουνto demand τοῦthe λαοῦpeople · Leading him into their midst they demanded of him that he should renounce faith in Christ in the presence of all the people.
23-4 τοῦthe δὲbut, and, however παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along τὴν‎the ἁπάντωνall things γνώμηνpurpose, decision ἐλευθέρᾳfree φωνῇvoice, sound, noise καὶand, also, even, then, next μᾶλλουmore or, either, than; +πριν=before προσεδόκησανto expect ἐπὶon, upon, against τῆςthe πληθύοςfullness ἁπάσηςall, whole παρρησιασαμένουto act with boldness καὶand, also, even, then, next ὁμολογήσαντοςto promise, assure υἱὸνson εἶναιto be ΘεοῦGod τὸνthe σωτῆραsaviour, deliverer καὶand, also, even, then, next κύριονlord ἡμῶνour, of us ἸησοῦνJesus, Joshua , μηκέθ᾽no more, no longer οἷοίso as τεand, both, if τὴν‎the τοῦthe ἀνδρὸςmale, man, husband μαρτυρίανtestimony φέρεινto bear, carry τῷthe καὶand, also, even, then, next δικαιότατονmost righteous αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along τοῖςthe πᾶσινevery, all δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ἀκρότηταextreme ἧςwho, which, that μετῄειto go among κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὸνthe βίονlife, livelihood φιλοσοφίαςlove of wisdom τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next θεοσεβείαςgodliness, religion πιστεύεσθαιto believe, trust , κτείνουσιto kill , καιρὸνtime, season εἰςinto, unto, for ἐξουσίανauthority λαβόντεςto take, receive τὴν‎the ἀναρχίανlack a leader , ὅτιbecause, for, that, since δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore τοῦthe ΦήστουFestus κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to αὐτὸhe, she, it, -self, same τοῦthe καιροῦalways, opportune ἐπὶon, upon, against τῆςthe ἸουδαίαςJudaea τελευτήσαντοςto end, die, finish , ἄναρχαwithout beginning καὶand, also, even, then, next ἀνεπιτρόπευταwithout guardian τὰthe τῆςthe αὐτόθιhere, in this place διοικήσεωςgovernment καθειστήκειto set down . But, contrary to the opinion of all, with a clear voice, and with greater boldness than they had anticipated, he spoke out before the whole multitude and confessed that our Saviour and Lord Jesus is the Son of God. But they were unable to bear longer the testimony of the man who, on account of the excellence of ascetic virtue and of piety which he exhibited in his life, was esteemed by all as the most just of men, and consequently they slew him. Opportunity for this deed of violence was furnished by the prevailing anarchy, which was caused by the fact that Festus had died just at this time in Judea, and that the province was thus without a governor and head.
23-5 τὸνthe δὲbut, and, however τῆςthe τοῦthe ἸακώβουJacob, James τελευτῆςend, death τρόπονway, manner, fashion ἤδηnow, already μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. πρότερονbefore, previous αἱthe παρατεθεῖσαιto place beside τοῦthe ΚλήμεντοςClement φωναὶnoises, voices δεδηλώκασινto make visible; to report , ἀπὸfrom, away from τοῦthe πτερυγίουwing βεβλῆσθαιto throw ξύλῳtree, wood τεand, both, if τὴν‎the πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with θάνατονdeath πεπλῆχθαιto strike αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἱστορηκότοςto inquire into a thing, to learn by inquiry · ἀκριβέστατάmost exact, strictest γεindeed, doubtless, yet μὴνmonth; and yet, indeed, surely τὰthe κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same the; oh ἩγήσιπποςHegesippus , ἐπὶon, upon, against τῆςthe πρώτηςfirst, former τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle γενόμενοςto become, come to be διαδοχῆςsuccession , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῷthe πέμπτῳfifth αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same ὑπομνήματιa record, memorial τοῦτονthis λέγωνto speak, talk, say ἱστορεῖto inquire into; record τὸνthe τρόπονway, manner, fashion · The manner of James’ death has been already indicated by the above-quoted words of Clement, who records that he was thrown from the pinnacle of the temple, and was beaten to death with a club. But Hegesippus, who lived immediately after the apostles, gives the most accurate account in the fifth book of his Memoirs. He writes as follows:
23-6 Διαδέχεταιto receive in turn τὴν‎the ἐκκλησίανassembly, church μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle the; oh ἀδελφὸςbrother τοῦthe κυρίουlord ἸάκωβοςJames, Jacob , the; oh ὀνομασθεὶςto call by name ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under πάντωνevery, all δίκαιοςjust, righteous ἀπὸfrom, away from τῶνthe τοῦthe κυρίουlord χρόνωνtime μέχριuntil, unto, as far as καὶand, also, even, then, next ἡμῶνour, of us , ἐπεὶsince, because, when, after πολλοὶmany, much ἸάκωβοιJameses ἐκαλοῦντοto call , James, the brother of the Lord, succeeded to the government of the Church in conjunction with the apostles. He has been called the Just by all from the time of our Saviour to the present day; for there were many that bore the name of James.
23-7 οὗτοςthus, so, this δὲbut, and, however ἐκout, out of κοιλίαςabdomen, belly μητρὸςmother αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same ἅγιοςholy ἦνto be , οἶνονwine καὶand, also, even, then, next σίκεραbeer, ale οὐκno, not ἔπιενto drink οὐδὲneither, nor, never ἔμψυχονanimate ἔφαγενto eat , ξυρὸνrazor ἐπὶon, upon, against τὴν‎the κεφαλὴνhead αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same οὐκno, not ἀνέβηto ascend, mount , ἔλαιονolive oil οὐκno, not ἠλείψατοto anoint , καὶand, also, even, then, next βαλανείῳbath οὐκno, not ἐχρήσατοto proclaim . He was holy from his mother’s womb; and he drank no wine nor strong drink, nor did he eat flesh. No razor came upon his head; he did not anoint himself with oil, and he did not use the bath.
23-8 τούτῳthis μόνῳonly, alone ἐξῆνit is allowed, possible εἰςinto, unto, for τὰthe ἅγιαsanctuary, saints, sacred, holy εἰσιέναιto enter · οὐδὲneither, nor, never γὰρfor, because ἐρεοῦνwoolen ἐφόρειto wear , ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but σινδόναςbleached linen . He alone was permitted to enter into the holy place; for he wore not woolen but linen garments.
23-9 καὶand, also, even, then, next μόνοςonly, alone εἰσήρχετοto enter εἰςinto, unto, for τὸνthe ναὸνtemple ηὑρίσκετόto find τεand, both, if κείμενοςto go to bed, lie down, fall asleep ἐπὶon, upon, against τοῖςthe γόνασινknees καὶand, also, even, then, next αἰτούμενοςto ask ὑπὲρ+ GEN = in behalf of, instead of; + ACC = over, above, beyond τοῦthe λαοῦpeople ἄφεσινrelease, forgiveness , ὡςas ἀπεσκληκέναιto dry up, wither τὰthe γόναταknee αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same δίκηνjustice, judgment καμήλουcamel , διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of τὸthe ἀεὶalways, ever κάμπτεινto bend, bow ἐπὶon, upon, against γόνυknee προσκυνοῦνταto revere τῷthe ΘεῷGod καὶand, also, even, then, next αἰτεῖσθαιto ask ἄφεσινrelease, forgiveness τῷthe λαῷpeople . And he was in the habit of entering alone into the temple, and was frequently found upon his knees begging forgiveness for the people, so that his knees became hard like those of a camel, in consequence of his constantly bending them in his worship of God, and asking forgiveness for the people.
23-10 διά+ Gen = through, by, in the midst of; διά + Acc = because of γέyet, doubtless, indeed, also τοιand yet, surely τὴν‎the ὑπερβολὴνabundance τῆςthe δικαιοσύνηςrighteousness αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same ἐκαλεῖτοto call the; oh δίκαιοςjust, righteous καὶand, also, even, then, next ὠβλίαςOblias , who, which, that; +enclitic=the ἐστινto be ἙλληνιστὶGreek περιοχὴaround about τοῦthe λαοῦpeople , καὶand, also, even, then, next δικαιοσύνηrighteousness , ὡςas οἱthe προφῆταιprophet δηλοῦσινto make clear περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same . Because of his exceeding great justice he was called the Just, and Oblias, which signifies in Greek, 'Bulwark of the people' and 'Justice,' in accordance with what the prophets declare concerning him.
23-11 τινὲςsomeone, something οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore τῶνthe ἑπτὰseven, seventh αἱρέσεωνsect, heresy τῶνthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῷthe λαῷpeople , τῶνthe προγεγραμμένωνto write before μοιme, myἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τοῖςthe Ὑπομνήμασινa record, memorial ” , ἐπυνθάνοντοto ask αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same τίςwho?, what? Why?; +enclitic=someone, something the θύραdoor, entrance, gate τοῦthe ἸησοῦJesus, Joshua ,1 καὶand, also, even, then, next ἔλεγενto say τοῦτονthis εἶναιto be τὸνthe σωτῆραsaviour, deliverer · Now some of the seven sects, which existed among the people and which have been mentioned by me in the Memoirs, asked him, ‘What is the gate of Jesus?’1and he replied that he was the Saviour.
1The tradition is obviously confused. Oblias may be an inaccurate transliteration of the Hebrew for “Rampart of the People,” but the reference to the prophets defies explanation. The “Gate” of Jesus is also a puzzle, but it may be connected with the early Christians’ name for themselves of “the Way.”
23-12 ἐξout, out of ὧνwho, whom, which τινεςsomeone, something ἐπίστευσανto believe, trust ὅτιbecause, for, that, since ἸησοῦςJesus, Joshua ἐστινto be the; oh ΧριστόςChrist . On account of these words some believed that Jesus is the Christ.
23-13 αἱthe δὲbut, and, however αἱρέσειςsect, heresy αἱthe προειρημέναιto predict οὐκno, not ἐπίστευονto believe οὔτεneither, nor, and not ἀνάστασινresurrection οὔτεneither, nor, and not ἐρχόμενονto come, go ἀποδοῦναιto deliver, pay, give away, give back ἑκάστῳevery, each κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὰthe ἔργαwork, deed, action αὐτοῦhe, she, it, -self, same · But the sects mentioned above did not believe either in a resurrection or in one’s coming to give to every man according to his works.
23-14 ὅσοιall who δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐπίστευσανto believe, trust , διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of ἸάκωβονJames, Jacob . But as many as believed did so on account of James.
23-15 πολλῶνmany, much οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore καὶand, also, even, then, next τῶνthe ἀρχόντωνruler, captain, premier πιστευόντωνto believe , ἦνto be θόρυβοςconfusion, trouble, uproar, tumult τῶνthe ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews καὶand, also, even, then, next γραμματέωνscribes καὶand, also, even, then, next ΦαρισαίωνPharisees λεγόντωνto speak, talk, say ὅτιbecause, for, that, since κινδυνεύειto be in danger πᾶςevery, all the; oh λαὸςpeople ἸησοῦνJesus, Joshua τὸνthe ΧριστὸνChrist προσδοκᾶνto expect, hope . Therefore when many even of the rulers believed, there was a commotion among the Jews and Scribes and Pharisees, who said that there was danger that the whole people would be looking for Jesus as the Christ.
23-16 ἔλεγονto speak, talk, say οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore συνελθόντεςto come together τῷthe ἸακώβῳJacob, James · “παρακαλοῦμένto summon σεyou , ἐπίσχεςto have, hold τὸνthe λαόνpeople , ἐπεὶsince, because, when, after ἐπλανήθηto make full εἰςinto, unto, for ἸησοῦνJesus, Joshua , ὡςas αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same ὄντοςto be τοῦthe ΧριστοῦChrist . Coming therefore in a body to James they said, 'We entreat you, restrain the people; for they are gone astray concerning Jesus, as if he were the Christ.
23-17 παρακαλοῦμένto summon σεyou πεῖσαιto convince πάνταςevery, all τοὺςthe ἐλθόνταςto come, go εἰςinto, unto, for τὴν‎the ἡμέρανday τοῦthe πάσχαpassover περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around ἸησοῦJesus, Joshua · σοὶyou γὰρfor, because πάντεςevery, all πειθόμεθαto obey, persuade . We entreat you to persuade all that have come to the feast of the Passover concerning Jesus; for we all have confidence in you.
23-18 ἡμεῖςwe, us γὰρfor, because μαρτυροῦμένto give evidence σοιyou καὶand, also, even, then, next πᾶςevery, all the; oh λαὸςpeople ὅτιbecause, for, that, since δίκαιοςjust, righteous εἶto be καὶand, also, even, then, next ὅτιbecause, for, that, since πρόσωπονface, surface οὐno, not λαμβάνειςto take, receive . For we bear you witness, as do all the people, that you are just, and do not respect persons.1
23-19 πεῖσονto persuade οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore σὺyou τὸνthe ὄχλονa crowd περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around ἸησοῦJesus, Joshua μὴno, not πλανᾶσθαιto lead astray · καὶand, also, even, then, next γὰρfor, because πᾶςevery, all the; oh λαὸςpeople καὶand, also, even, then, next πάντεςevery, all πειθόμεθάto obey, persuade σοιyou . Therefore, persuade the multitude not to be led astray concerning Jesus. For the whole people, and all of us also, have confidence in you.
23-20 στῆθιto stand οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ἐπὶon, upon, against τὸthe πτερύγιονupper wing τοῦthe ἱεροῦtemple , ἵναin order that, so that ἄνωθενtop, above, again ᾖςto be ἐπιφανὴςevident, notable καὶand, also, even, then, next to be εὐάκουστάaudible σουyou, your τὰthe ῥήματαword παντὶall, every, whole τῷthe λαῷpeople . Stand therefore upon the pinnacle of the temple, that from that high position you may be clearly seen, and that your words may be readily heard by all the people.
23-21 διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of γὰρfor, because τὸthe πάσχαpassover συνεληλύθασιto come/go together πᾶσαιall, whole αἱthe φυλαὶtribes μετὰ+G=with; +A=after καὶand, also, even, then, next τῶνthe ἐθνῶνgentile, nation, people . ’ For all the tribes, with the Gentiles also, have come together on account of the Passover.
23-22 ἔστησανto make to stand οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore οἱthe προειρημένοιto predict γραμματεῖςscribe καὶand, also, even, then, next ΦαρισαῖοιPharisees τὸνthe ἸάκωβονJames, Jacob ἐπὶon, upon, against τὸthe πτερύγιονupper wing τοῦthe ναοῦtemple , καὶand, also, even, then, next ἔκραξανto cry out αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same καὶand, also, even, then, next εἶπανto speak, talk, sayδίκαιεrighteous, just , who, which, that πάντεςevery, all πείθεσθαιto persuade, obey ὀφείλομενto owe , ἐπεὶsince, because, when, after the; oh λαὸςpeople πλανᾶταιto deceive, lead astray ὀπίσωafter, follow, behind ἸησοῦJesus, Joshua τοῦthe σταυρωθέντοςto fence with pales , ἀπάγγειλονto bring news, tell ἡμῖνus, our τίςwho?, what? Why?; +enclitic=someone, something the θύραdoor, entrance, gate τοῦthe ἸησοῦJesus, Joshua . ’ The aforesaid Scribes and Pharisees therefore placed James upon the pinnacle of the temple, and cried out to him and said: ‘You just one, in whom we ought all to have confidence, forasmuch as the people are led astray after Jesus, the crucified one, declare to us, what is the gate of Jesus.’
23-23 καὶand, also, even, then, next ἀπεκρίνατοto answer φωνῇvoice, sound, noise μεγάλῃgreat (in size, sound, age, strength, quality)τίwho? what?, someone, something μεme ἐπερωτᾶτεto consult, inquire of περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοῦthe υἱοῦson τοῦthe ἀνθρώπουman , καὶand, also, even, then, next αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same κάθηταιto sit down ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῷthe οὐρανῷheaven, sky ἐκout, out of δεξιῶνright side, right hand τῆςthe μεγάληςgreat (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) δυνάμεωςability, power , καὶand, also, even, then, next μέλλειto intend, be about to ἔρχεσθαιto come, go ἐπὶon, upon, against τῶνthe νεφελῶνcloud τοῦthe οὐρανοῦheaven, sky ;’ And he answered with a loud voice, ‘Why do you ask me concerning Jesus, the Son of Man? He himself sits in heaven at the right hand of the great Power, and is about to come upon the clouds of heaven.’
23-24 καὶand, also, even, then, next πολλῶνmany, much πληροφορηθέντωνto fulfill καὶand, also, even, then, next δοξαζόντωνto glorify 1 ἐπὶon, upon, against τῇthe μαρτυρίᾳwitness, record τοῦthe ἸακώβουJacob, James καὶand, also, even, then, next λεγόντωνto speak, talk, sayὡσαννὰhosanna τῷthe υἱῷson ΔαυίδDavid ,’ τότεthen πάλινagain, back ἐπιστρέψαςto turn οἱthe αὐτοὶhe, she, it, self, same γραμματεῖςscribe καὶand, also, even, then, next ΦαρισαῖοιPharisees πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with ἀλλήλουςone another, each other ἔλεγονto speak, talk, sayκακῶςevil, miserably, amiss, wrong ἐποιήσαμενto do, make τοιαύτηνsuch μαρτυρίανtestimony παρασχόντεςto hand over τῷthe ἸησοῦJesus, Joshua · ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but ἀναβάντεςto ascend, mount καταβάλωμενto overthrow αὐτόνhe, she, it, -self, same , ἵναin order that, so that φοβηθέντεςto fear, respect, revere μὴno, not πιστεύσωσινto believe αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same . ’ And when many were fully convinced and gloried1in the testimony of James, and said, ‘Hosanna to the Son of David,’ these same Scribes and Pharisees said again to one another, ‘We have done badly in supplying such testimony to Jesus. But let us go up and throw him down, in order that they may be afraid to believe him.’
1Literally, “glorified.”
23-25 καὶand, also, even, then, next ἔκραξανto cry out λέγοντεςto speak, talk, sayoh! oh! , καὶand, also, even, then, next the; oh δίκαιοςjust, righteous ἐπλανήθηto make full , ” καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐπλήρωσανto make full τὴν‎the γραφὴscripture, document τὴν‎the ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τῷthe ἩσαΐᾳIsaiah 1 γεγραμμένηνto writeἄρωμενto lift up, take away τὸνthe δίκαιονrighteous , ὅτιbecause, for, that, since δύσχρηστοςinconvenient ἡμῖνus, our ἐστινto be · τοίνυνtruly now, hence, therefore τὰthe γενήματαoffspring, produce, seed τῶνthe ἔργωνwork, deed [Gen Pl N] αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same φάγονταιto eat . ’ And they cried out, saying, ‘Oh! Oh! the just man is also in error.’ and they fulfilled the Scripture written in Isaiah,1‘Let us take away the just man, because he is troublesome to us: therefore they shall eat the fruit of their doings.’
1The first part of the quotation is from the Wisdom of Solomon (Apocrypha), not Isaiah.
23-26 ἀναβάντεςto ascend, mount οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore κατέβαλονto throw down τὸνthe δίκαιονrighteous . καὶand, also, even, then, next ἔλεγονto speak, talk, say ἀλλήλοιςone another, each otherλιθάσωμενto stone ἸάκωβονJames, Jacob τὸνthe δίκαιονrighteous ,’ καὶand, also, even, then, next ἤρξαντοto rule; to begin λιθάζεινto stone αὐτόνhe, she, it, -self, same , ἐπεὶsince, because, when, after καταβληθεὶςto throw down οὐκno, not ἀπέθανενto die · ἀλλὰotherwise, however, but στραφεὶςto turn ἔθηκεto put, place τὰthe γόναταknee λέγωνto speak, talk, sayπαρακαλῶto appeal, summon, comfort , κύριεlord θεὲVOC: god; Hebrew: room πάτερfather , ἄφεςto dismiss, allow, forgive αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same · οὐno, not γὰρfor, because οἴδασινto know τίwho? what?, someone, something ποιοῦσινto do, make . ’ So they went up and threw down the just man, and said to each other, ‘Let us stone James the Just.’ and they began to stone him, for he was not killed by the fall; but he turned and knelt down and said, ‘I entreat you, Lord God our Father, forgive them, for they know not what they do.’1
23-27 οὕτωςthus, so, this way δὲbut, and, however καταλιθοβολούντωνto stone αὐτόνhe, she, it, -self, same , εἷςone τῶνthe ἱερέωνpriest τῶνthe υἱῶνson ῬηχὰβRechab υἱοῦson ῬαχαβείμRechabim ,1 τῶνthe μαρτυρουμένωνto bear witness ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under ἹερεμίουJeremiah τοῦthe προφήτουprophet , ἔκραζενto cry out λέγωνto speak, talk, sayΠαύσασθεto cease · τίwho? what?, someone, something ποιεῖτεto do, make ; εὔχεταιto pray; one who prays ὑπὲρ+ GEN = in behalf of, instead of; + ACC = over, above, beyond ὑμῶνyou the; oh δίκαιοςjust, righteous . ’ And while they were thus stoning him one of the priests of the sons of Rechab, the son of the Rechabites,1who are mentioned by Jeremiah the prophet, cried out, saying, ‘Stop. What are you doing? the just one prays for you.’
1This story is confused and improbable. The text of Hegesiplpus must be corrupt, for Rechabim is only the Hebrew plural and merely repeats the previous phrase. Moreover, the Rechabites were a tribe of Kenites who were adopted into Israel 1 Chronicles 2:55 and Jeremiah 35:19 . There is no evidence that a Rechabite was ever counted as a Levite, or that the name was that of a sect to which a priest or Levite could have belonged. Epiphanius (Haer. lxxviii. 14) replaces this mysterious Rechabite by Simeon the son of Clopas.
23-28 καὶand, also, even, then, next λαβώνto take, receive τιςsomeone, a certain one/thing ἀπ᾽from, away from αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same , εἷςone τῶνthe γναφέωνfuller who bleaches , τὸthe ξύλονtree, staff, upright part , ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to who, which, that ἀποπιέζειto press, squeeze τὰthe ἱμάτιαclothes , ἤνεγκενto buy, carry κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τῆςthe κεφαλῆςhead τοῦthe δικαίουrighteous , καὶand, also, even, then, next οὕτωςthus, so, this way ἐμαρτύρησενto testify, martyr . And one of them, who was a fuller, took the club with which he beat out clothes and struck the just man on the head. And thus he suffered martyrdom.
23-29 καὶand, also, even, then, next ἔθαψανto bury αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἐπὶon, upon, against τῷthe τόπῳplace παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along τῷthe ναῷtemple , καὶand, also, even, then, next ἔτιever, any longer, yet αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same the στήληtablet, pillar μένειto wait, endure, dwell, remain παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along τῷthe ναῷtemple . And they buried him on the spot, by the temple, and his monument still remains by the temple.
23-30 μάρτυςmartyr, witness οὗτοςthus, so, this ἀληθὴςtruthful ἸουδαίοιςJews τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next ἝλλησινGreek γεγένηταιto become, come to be ὅτιbecause, for, that, since ἸησοῦςJesus, Joshua the; oh ΧριστόςChrist ἐστινto be . He became a true witness, both to Jews and Greeks, that Jesus is the Christ.
23-31 καὶand, also, even, then, next εὐθὺςimmediately ΟὐεσπασιανὸςVespasian πολιορκεῖto besiege αὐτούςhe, she, it, -self, same . ” And immediately Vespasian besieged them.
23-32 Ταῦταthese (things) διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of πλάτουςwide, width , συνῳδάagreement γέyet, doubtless, indeed, also τοιand yet, surely τῷthe ΚλήμεντιClement καὶand, also, even, then, next the; oh ἩγήσιπποςHegesippus . These things are related at length by Hegesippus, who is in agreement with Clement.
23-33 οὕτωthus, even so δὲbut, and, however ἄραthen, therefore, perhaps θαυμάσιόςwonderful τιςsomeone, a certain one/thing ἦνto be καὶand, also, even, then, next παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along τοῖςthe ἄλλοιςother, another, next ἅπασινall ἐπὶon, upon, against Δικαιοσύνῃrighteousness βεβόητοto shout the; oh ἸάκωβοςJames, Jacob , ὡςas καὶand, also, even, then, next τοὺςthe ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews ἔμφροναςrational δοξάζεινto glorify ταύτηνthis εἶναιto be τὴν‎the αἰτίανcause, accusation τῆςthe παραχρῆμαimmediately μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τὸthe μαρτύριονto witness, give evidence αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same πολιορκίαςdistress, siege τῆςthe ἹερουσαλήμJerusalem , ἣνwho, which, that δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of οὐδὲνno one, nothing ἕτερονother, another, next αὐτοῖςhe, she, it, -self, same συμβῆναιto meet, happen or, either, than; +πριν=before διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of τὸthe κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same τολμηθὲνto undertake (a task) ἄγοςa cause of awe . James was so admirable a man and so celebrated among all for his justice, that the more sensible even of the Jews were of the opinion that this was the cause of the siege of Jerusalem, which happened to them immediately after his martyrdom for no other reason than their daring act against him.
23-34 Ἀμέλειto neglect γέyet, doubtless, indeed, also τοιand yet, surely the; oh ἸώσηποςJosephus, Joseph οὐκno, not ἀπώκνησενto shrink from καὶand, also, even, then, next τοῦτ᾽this ἐγγράφωςrecorded ἐπιμαρτύρασθαιto call to witness δι᾽+G=through, by; +A=because of ὧνwho, whom, which φησινto affirm, say λέξεωνspeechταῦταthese (things) δὲbut, and, however συμβέβηκενto meet, happen ἸουδαίοιςJews κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to ἐκδίκησινvengeance, punishment, revenge ἸακώβουJacob, James τοῦthe δικαίουrighteous , ὃςwho, which, that ἦνto be ἀδελφὸςbrother ἸησοῦJesus, Joshua τοῦthe λεγομένουto speak, talk, say ΧριστοῦChrist , Josephus, at least, has not hesitated to testify this in his writings, where he says, “These things happened to the Jews to avenge James the Just, who was a brother of Jesus, that is called the Christ.
23-35 ἐπειδήπερsince, whenever δικαιότατονmost righteous αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ὄνταto be οἱthe ἸουδαῖοιJews, Judea ἀπέκτεινανto kill .”1 For the Jews slew him, although he was a most just man.”1
1This passage is not in the traditional text of Josephus.
23-36 the; oh δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτὸςhe, she, it, -self, same καὶand, also, even, then, next τὸνthe θάνατονdeath αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to εἰκοστῷtwentieth τῆςthe Ἀρχαιολογίαςancient history δηλοῖto indicate, signify διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of τούτωνthese · “πέμπειto send δὲbut, and, however ΚαῖσαρCaesar ἈλβῖνονAlbinus εἰςinto, unto, for τὴν‎the ἸουδαίανJudaea ἔπαρχονa commander, governor , ΦήστουFestus τὴν‎the τελευτὴνend, death, limit πυθόμενοςto understand . And the same writer records his death also in the twentieth book of his Antiquities in the following words: But the emperor, when he learned of the death of Festus, sent Albinus to be procurator of Judea.
23-37 the; oh δὲbut, and, however νεώτεροςnewer ἌνανοςAnanus , ὃνwhom, which, that τὴν‎the ἀρχιερωσύνηνhigh priesthood εἴπαμενto speak, talk, say παρειληφέναιto receive from , θρασὺςbold ἦνto be τὸνthe τρόπονway, manner, fashion καὶand, also, even, then, next τολμητὴςdaring, presumptuous διαφερόντωςdifferently from , But the younger Ananus, who, as we have already said, had obtained the high priesthood, was of an exceedingly bold and reckless disposition.
23-38 αἵρεσινchoice; heresy δὲbut, and, however μετῄειto go among τὴν‎the ΣαδδουκαίωνSaddoukais , οἵπερwhither εἰσὶto be περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τὰςthe κρίσειςjudgment ὠμοὶraw παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along πάνταςevery, all τοὺςthe ἸουδαίουςJews , καθὼςjust as, even as, according to ἤδηnow, already δεδηλώκαμενto make visible; to report . He belonged, moreover, to the sect of the Sadducees, who are the most cruel of all the Jews in the execution of judgment, as we have already shown.
23-39 ἅτεsince, just as δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore τοιοῦτοςsuch ὢνto be the; oh ἌνανοςAnanus , νομίσαςto think, suppose ἔχεινto have, hold καιρὸνtime, season ἐπιτήδειονuseful διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of τὸthe τεθνάναιto die, be killed μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. ΦῆστονFēstus , ἈλβῖνονAlbinus δ᾽but, and, however, now ἔτιever, any longer, yet κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὴν‎the ὁδὸνroad, way ὑπάρχεινto exist; possessions , καθίζειto sit συνέδριονcouncil κριτῶνjudge , καὶand, also, even, then, next παραγαγὼνto bring in, lead in εἰςinto, unto, for αὐτὸhe, she, it, -self, same τὸνthe ἀδελφὸνbrother ἸησοῦJesus, Joshua , τοῦthe ΧριστοῦChrist λεγομένουto speak, talk, say , ἸάκωβοςJames, Jacob ὄνομαname αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same , καίand, also, even, then, next τιναςsomeone, something ἑτέρουςother, another, next , ὡςas παρανομησάντωνto transgresss the law κατηγορίανaccusation ποιησάμενοςto do, make , παρέδωκενto give over, betray λευσθησομένουςto stone . Ananus, therefore, being of this character, and supposing that he had a favorable opportunity on account of the fact that Festus was dead, and Albinus was still on the way, called together the Sanhedrin, and brought before them the brother of Jesus, the so-called Christ, James by name, together with some others, and accused them of violating the law, and condemned them to be stoned.
23-40 ὅσοιall who δὲbut, and, however ἐδόκουνto think, seem, suppose ἐπιεικέστατοιmost fitting, most suitable τῶνthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὴν‎the πόλινcity εἶναιto be καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰthe περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τοὺςthe νόμουςlaw ἀκριβεῖςexact , βαρέωςto be indignant; dull, heavy ἤνεγκανto bear, bring, carry ἐπὶon, upon, against τούτῳthis , καὶand, also, even, then, next πέμπουσιto send πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τὸνthe βασιλέαking 1 κρύφαsecretly , παρακαλοῦντεςto encourage αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἐπιστεῖλαιto write a letter τῷthe ἈνάνῳAnanus μηκέτιno longer, not yet τοιαῦταof such kind πράσσεινto commit, perform · μηδὲand not, but not; neither … nor γὰρfor, because τὸthe πρῶτονfirst, before ὀρθῶςplainly, correctly αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same πεποιηκέναιto do, make . But those in the city who seemed most moderate and skilled in the law were very angry at this, and sent secretly to the king,1requesting him to order Ananus to cease such proceedings. For he had not done right even this first time.
1Or, possibly, to King Agrippa.
23-41 τινὲςsomeone, something δ᾽but, and, however, now αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same καὶand, also, even, then, next τὸνthe ἈλβῖνονAlbinus ὑπαντιάζουσινto go to meet, encounter ἀπὸfrom, away from τῆςthe ἈλεξανδρείαςAlexandria ὁδοιποροῦνταto travel, walk , καὶand, also, even, then, next διδάσκουσινto teach ὡςas οὐκno, not ἐξὸνto permit, be proper ἦνto be ἈνάνῳAnanus χωρὶςwithout, apart from αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same γνώμηςadvice, consent, opinion καθίσαιto appoint; to settle down; to sit συνέδριονcouncil . And certain of them also went to meet Albinus, who was journeying from Alexandria, and reminded him that it was not lawful for Ananus to summon the Sanhedrin without his knowledge.
23-42 ἈλβῖνοςAlbinus δὲbut, and, however πεισθεὶςto persuade τοῖςthe λεγομένοιςto speak, talk, say , γράφειto write μετ᾽+G=with; +A=after ὀργῆςanger τῷthe ἈνάνῳAnanus , λήψεσθαιto take, receive παρ᾽+G=from; +D=before; +A=beside, along αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same δίκαςverdict, justice ἀπειλῶνto threaten , καὶand, also, even, then, next the; oh βασιλεὺςking ἈγρίππαςAgrippa διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of τοῦτοthis τὴν‎the ἀρχιερωσύνηνhigh priesthood ἀφελόμενοςto take away, remove αὐτοῦ‎he, she, it, -self, same ἄρξαντοςto be first μῆναςmonth τρεῖςthree , ἸησοῦνJesus, Joshua τὸνthe τοῦthe ΔαμμαίουDammaeus κατέστησενto appoint, set down, ordain .” And Albinus, being persuaded by their representations, wrote in anger to Ananus, threatening him with punishment. And the king, Agrippa, in consequence, deprived him of the high priesthood, which he had held three months, and appointed Jesus, the son of Damnaeus.
23-43 Τοιαῦταsuch καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ἸάκωβονJames, Jacob , οὗwhere; who, which, that the πρώτηfirst τῶνthe ὀνομαζομένωνto name καθολικῶνgeneral ἐπιστολῶνepistle, letter εἶναιto be λέγεταιto speak, talk, say · These things are recorded concerning James, who is said to be the author of the first of the so-called catholic epistles.
23-44 ἰστέονone must see δὲbut, and, however ὡςas νοθεύεταιto currupt, adulterate μένindeed, on the other hand , οὐno, not πολλοὶmany, much γοῦνtherefore, hence τῶνthe παλαιῶνold αὐτῆςhe, she, it, -self, same ἐμνημόνευσανto remember , ὡςas οὐδὲneither, nor, never τῆςthe λεγομένηςto speak, talk, say ἸούδαJude, Judas , μιᾶςone, first καὶand, also, even, then, next αὐτῆςhe, she, it, -self, same οὔσηςto be τῶνthe ἑπτὰseven, seventh λεγομένωνto speak, talk, say καθολικῶνgeneral · ὅμωςeven, at the same time δ᾽but, and, however, now ἴσμενto know καὶand, also, even, then, next ταύταςthese μετὰ+G=with; +A=after τῶνthe λοιπῶνremaining ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to πλείσταιςvery great, most δεδημοσιευμέναςto confiscate; to be a public man ἐκκλησίαιςassemblies, churches . But it is to be observed that it is disputed; at least, not many of the ancients have mentioned it, as is the case likewise with the epistle that bears the name of Jude, which is also one of the seven so-called catholic epistles. Nevertheless we know that these also, with the rest, have been read publicly in very many churches.

Chapter 24

24-1 ΝέρωνοςNero δὲbut, and, however ὄγδοονeighth ἄγοντοςto lead, bring τῆςthe βασιλείαςroyalty, kingdom, queen ἔτοςyear , πρῶτοςfirst μετὰ+G=with; +A=after ΜάρκονMarcus, Mark τὸνthe εὐαγγελιστὴνevangelist τῆςthe ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ἈλεξανδρείᾳAlexandria παροικίαςparish, congregation 1 ἈννιανὸςAnnianus τὴν‎the λειτουργίανministry διαδέχεταιto receive in turn . When Nero was in the eighth year of his reign, Annianus succeeded Mark the Evangelist in the administration of the parish1of Alexandria.
1Literally, colony or province.

Chapter 25

25-1 Κραταιουμένηςto strengthen δ᾽but, and, however, now ἤδηnow, already τῷthe ΝέρωνιNero τῆςthe ἀρχῆςbeginning; ruler , εἰςinto, unto, for ἀνοσίουςunholy, profane ὀκείλαςto run ashore ἐπιτηδεύσειςto pursue , κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to αὐτῆςhe, she, it, -self, same ὡπλίζετοto equip, arm τῆςthe εἰςinto, unto, for τὸνthe τῶνthe ὅλωνall, whole ΘεὸνGod εὐσεβείαςgodliness, religion . When the government of Nero was now firmly established, he began to plunge into unholy pursuits, and armed himself even against the religion of the God of the universe.
25-2 γράφεινto write μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore οἷόςsuch as τιςsomeone, a certain one/thing οὗτοςthus, so, this γεγένηταιto become, come to be τὴν‎the μοχθηρίανwickedness , οὐno, not τῆςthe παρούσηςto be present γένοιτ᾽to become, come to be ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever σχολῆςleisure · πολλῶνmany, much γεindeed, doubtless, yet μὴνmonth; and yet, indeed, surely τὰthe κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἀκριβεστάταιςmost exact, strictest παραδεδωκότωνto hand over διηγήσεσινnarration , πάρεστινto be present ὅτῳanyone who φίλονloving, kind; friend , ἐξout, out of αὐτῶνhe, she, it , -self, same τὴν‎the σκαιότηταawkwardness τῆςthe τἀνδρὸςman, husband ἐκτόπουforeign καταθεωρῆσαιto observe, contemplate μανίαςcrazinesses , καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ἣνwho, which, that οὐno, not μετὰ+G=with; +A=after λογισμοῦcalculation, reasoning μυρίων10,000 ὅσωνas great, as much ἀπωλείαςruin, damnation, destruction διεξελθώνto go through , ἐπὶon, upon, against τοσαύτηνso great, so much ἤλασεto drive μιαιφονίανblood-thirstiness , ὡςas μηδὲand not, but not; neither … nor τῶνthe οἰκειοτάτωνmost fitting, most proper τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next φιλτάτωνnearest and dearest ἐπισχεῖνto restrain, stop , μητέραmother δὲbut, and, however ὁμοίωςsimilarly, likewise καὶand, also, even, then, next ἀδελφοὺςbrothers καὶand, also, even, then, next γυναῖκαwoman, wife σὺν+D=with καὶand, also, even, then, next ἄλλοιςother, another, next μυρίοις10,000 τῷthe γένειnation, kind, type, relative προσήκουσινto belong to τρόπονway, manner, fashion ἐχθρῶνhateful, hostile, enemy καὶand, also, even, then, next πολεμίωνhostile, enemy of war ποικίλαιςambiguous, deceitful, various θανάτωνdeath ἰδέαιςform, appearance διαχρήσασθαιto use constantly . To describe the greatness of his depravity does not lie within the plan of the present work. As there are many indeed that have recorded his history in most accurate narratives, every one may at his pleasure learn from them the coarseness of the man’s extraordinary madness, under the influence of which, after he had accomplished the destruction of so many myriads without any reason, he ran into such blood-guiltiness that he did not spare even his nearest relatives and dearest friends, but destroyed his mother and his brothers and his wife, with very many others of his own family as he would private and public enemies, with various kinds of deaths.
25-3 ἐνέδειto bind in, bind on; fall short δ᾽but, and, however, now ἄραthen, therefore, perhaps τοῖςthe πᾶσιevery, all καὶand, also, even, then, next τοῦτ᾽this ἐπιγραφῆναιto inscribe αὐτῷhe, she, it, -self, same , ὡςas ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever πρῶτοςfirst αὐτοκρατόρωνone’s own master τῆςthe εἰςinto, unto, for τὸthe θεῖονdivine, sulphur, godhead εὐσεβείαςgodliness, religion πολέμιοςenemy of war ἀναδειχθείηto exhibit . But with all these things this particular in the catalogue of his crimes was still wanting, that he was the first of the emperors who showed himself an enemy of the divine religion.
25-4 τούτουthis πάλινagain, back ἐπιστρέψαςto turn the; oh ῬωμαῖοςRōman ΤερτυλλιανὸςTertullian ὧδέhere, hither, there, thus πωςperhaps, somehow, something like λέγωνto speak, talk, say μνημονεύειto mention, rememberἐντύχετεto meet with τοῖςthe ὑπομνήμασινa record, memorial ὑμῶνyou , ἐκεῖthere εὑρήσετεto find πρῶτονfirst, before ΝέρωναNero τοῦτοthis τὸthe δόγμαdogma, decree, teaching , ἡνίκαevery time that, when μάλισταespecially, most of all, particularly ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to ῬώμῃRome , τὴν‎the ἀνατολὴνdawn πᾶσανevery, all ὑποτάξαςto subject , ὠμὸςraw, savage ἦνto be εἰςinto, unto, for πάνταςevery, all , διώξανταto pursue, persecute .1 The Roman Tertullian is likewise a witness of this. He writes as follows: Examine your records. There you will find that Nero was the first that persecuted this doctrine, particularly then when after subduing all the east, he exercised his cruelty against all at Rome.1
1The Greek is scarcely translatable and is clearly a bad rendering of Tertullian: “Consulite commentarios uestros, illic reperietis primum Neronem in hanc sectam cum maxime Romae orientem Caesariano gladio ferocisse” (“Consult your records: you will find that Nero was the first to let the imperial sword rage against this sect when it was just springing up in Rome”).
25-5 τοιούτωνsuch as this τῆςthe κολάσεωςpunishment, torment ἡμῶνour, of us ἀρχηγῷleader, ruler καυχώμεθαto boast . We glory in having such a man the leader in our punishment.
25-6 the; oh γὰρfor, because εἰδὼςto know ἐκεῖνονthat νοῆσαιto consider, understand δύναταιto be able ὡςas οὐκno, not ἄνwhatever, wherever, whoever , εἰCONJ: if, since μὴno, not μέγαgreat (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) τιanything, something ἀγαθὸνgood ἦνto be , ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under ΝέρωνοςNero κατακριθῆναιto condemn . ” For whoever knows him can understand that nothing was condemned by Nero unless it was something of great excellence.
25-7 Ταύτῃthis γοῦνtherefore, hence οὗτοςthus, so, this , θεομάχοςfighting against God ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τοῖςthe μάλισταespecially, most of all, particularly πρῶτοςfirst ἀνακηρυχθείςto publish abroad , ἐπὶon, upon, against τὰςthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle ἐπήρθηto be exalted σφαγάςslaughter . Thus publicly announcing himself as the first among God’s chief enemies, he was led on to the slaughter of the apostles.
25-8 ΠαῦλοςPaul δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore οὖνand, so, truly, now, therefore ἐπ᾽on, upon, against αὐτῆςhe, she, it, -self, same ῬώμηςRome τὴν‎the κεφαλὴνhead ἀποτμηθῆναιto cut off, sever καὶand, also, even, then, next ΠέτροςPeter ὡσαύτωςlikewise ἀνασκολοπισθῆναιto impale κατ᾽+G=down from; +A=according to αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἱστοροῦνταιto inquire into , καὶand, also, even, then, next πιστοῦταίto make trustworthy γεindeed, doubtless, yet τὴν‎the ἱστορίανhistory, story, account the ΠέτρουPeter καὶand, also, even, then, next ΠαύλουPaul, Paulus εἰςinto, unto, for δεῦροcome here; until now κρατήσασαto be strong ἐπὶon, upon, against τῶνthe αὐτόθιhere, in this place κοιμητηρίωνsleeping room πρόσρησιςan addressing, naming , It is, therefore, recorded that Paul was beheaded in Rome itself, and that Peter likewise was crucified under Nero. This account of Peter and Paul is substantiated by the fact that their names are preserved in the cemeteries of that place even to the present day.
25-9 οὐδὲνno one, nothing δὲbut, and, however ἧττονless, fewer καὶand, also, even, then, next ἐκκλησιαστικὸςecclesiastical ἀνήρman, male, husband , ΓάϊοςGaius, Caius ὄνομαname , κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΖεφυρῖνονZephyrinus ῬωμαίωνRoman, Latin γεγονὼςto become, come to be ἐπίσκοπονoverseer, bishop · ὃςwho, which, that δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore ΠρόκλῳProclus τῆςthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ΦρύγαςPhrygians 1 προϊσταμένῳto set before; to send on γνώμηςadvice, consent, opinion ἐγγράφωςrecorded διαλεχθείςto argue, pick out , αὐτὰhe, she, it, -self, same δὴplease, indeed, also, and, now, therefore ταῦταthese (things) περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῶνthe τόπωνplace , ἔνθαthen, there τῶνthe εἰρημένωνto speak, talk, say ἀποστόλωνapostle τὰthe ἱερὰsacred things σκηνώματαtabernacle, tent κατατέθειταιto place, put , φησίνto affirm, say · It is confirmed likewise by Caius, a member of the Church, who arose under Zephyrinus, bishop of Rome. He, in a published disputation with Proclus, the leader of the Phrygian heresy,1speaks as follows concerning the places where the sacred corpses of the aforesaid apostles are laid:
1Literally, “the opinion among the Phrygians.” Montanus was of Phrygian origin. Proclus was one of his successors.
25-10 ἐγὼI δὲbut, and, however τὰthe τρόπαιαtrophy τῶνthe ἀποστόλωνapostle ἔχωto have, hold δεῖξαιto show . “But I can show the trophies of the apostles.
25-11 ἐὰνif, though, when, whenever γὰρfor, because θελήσῃςto want, wish, will, plan ἀπελθεῖνto go away, depart ἐπὶon, upon, against τὸνthe ΒασικανὸνVatican or, either, than; +πριν=before ἐπὶon, upon, against τὴν‎the ὁδὸνroad, way τὴν‎the ὨστίανOstian , εὑρήσειςto find τὰthe τρόπαιαtrophy τῶνthe ταύτηνthis ἱδρυσαμένωνto seat, set down τὴν‎the ἐκκλησίανassembly, church .” For if you will go to the Vatican or to the Ostian way, you will find the trophies of those who laid the foundations of this church.”1
1According to the tradition that Peter was crucified on the Vatican (the exact spot is variously indicated), and Paul beheaded on the Via Ostia at Tre Fontane.
25-12 Ὡςhow, when δὲbut, and, however κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὸνthe αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same ἄμφωboth καιρὸνtime, season ἐμαρτύρησανto witness , ΚορινθίωνCorinth ἐπίσκοποςoverseer, bishop ΔιονύσιοςDionysius ἐγγράφωςrecorded ῬωμαίοιςRomans ὁμιλῶνa crowd , ὧδεhere παρίστησινto stand besideταῦταthese (things) καὶand, also, even, then, next ὑμεῖςyou διὰ+G=through, by; +A=because of τῆςthe τοσαύτηςso great, so much νουθεσίαςadmonition τὴν‎the ἀπὸfrom, away from ΠέτρουPeter καὶand, also, even, then, next ΠαύλουPaul, Paulus φυτείανplant γενηθεῖσανto become ῬωμαίωνRoman, Latin τεand, both, if καὶand, also, even, then, next ΚορινθίωνCorinth συνεκεράσατεto mix together. And that they both suffered martyrdom at the same time is stated by Dionysius, bishop of Corinth, in his epistle to the Romans, in the following words: You have thus by such an admonition bound together the planting of Peter and of Paul at Rome and Corinth.
25-13 καὶand, also, even, then, next γὰρfor, because ἄμφωboth καὶand, also, even, then, next εἰςinto, unto, for τὴν‎the ἡμετέρανour ΚόρινθονCorinth φυτεύσαντεςto plant (trees) ἡμᾶςwe, us ὁμοίωςsimilarly, likewise ἐδίδαξανto teach, ὁμοίωςsimilarly, likewise δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next εἰςinto, unto, for τὴν‎the ἸταλίανItaly ὁμόσεtogether διδάξαντεςto teach ἐμαρτύρησανto witness κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along τὸνthe αὐτὸνhe, she, it, -self, same καιρόνa while, season, time . ” For both of them planted and likewise taught us in our Corinth. And they taught together in like manner in Italy, and suffered martyrdom at the same time.
25-14 καὶand, also, even, then, next ταῦταthese (things) δέbut, and, however , ὡςas ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever ἔτιever, any longer, yet μᾶλλονmore πιστωθείηto make trustworthy τὰthe τῆςthe ἱστορίαςhistory, story . I have quoted these things in order that the truth of the history might be still more confirmed.

Chapter 26

26-1 Αὖθιςback again δ᾽but, and, however, now the; oh ἸώσηποςJosephus, Joseph πλεῖσταvery great, most ὅσαall who; as great as περὶ+G=about, concerning; +A=about, around τῆςthe τὸthe πᾶνevery, all ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews ἔθνοςgentile, nation, people καταλαβούσηςto seize, win διελθὼνto go through συμφορᾶςcalamities , δηλοῖto indicate, signify κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along λέξινspeech ἐπὶon, upon, against πλείστοιςgreatest, very many ἄλλοιςother, another, next μυρίους10,000 ὅσουςas great as, much as τῶνthe παρὰ+G= from; +D=before; +A=beside, along ἸουδαίοιςJews τετιμημένωνto honour, revere μάστιξινwhip αἰκισθένταςto mistreat, torture ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to αὐτῇhe, she, it, -self, same τῇthe ἹερουσαλὴμJerusalem ἀνασταυρωθῆναιto crucify again ὑπὸ+ G = by (agency); + A = under ΦλώρουFlorus· Josephus again, after relating many things in connection with the calamity which came upon the whole Jewish nation, records, in addition to many other circumstances, that a great many of the most honourable among the Jews were scourged in Jerusalem itself and then crucified by Florus.
26-2 τοῦτονthis δὲbut, and, however εἶναιto be τῆςthe ἸουδαίαςJudaea ἐπίτροπονguardian , ὁπηνίκαsince, when τὴν‎the ἀρχὴνrule, beginning ἀναρριπισθῆναιto rekindle τοῦthe πολέμουbattle, war , ἔτουςyear δωδεκάτουtwelfth τῆςthe ΝέρωνοςNero ἡγεμονίαςgovernor , συνέβηto happen, occur, go with . It happened that he was procurator of Judea when the war began to be kindled, in the twelfth year of Nero.
26-3 εἶταthen, after that δὲbut, and, however καὶand, also, even, then, next καθ᾽+G=down from, upon; +A=according to, along ὅληνall, whole τὴν‎the ΣυρίανSyria ἐπὶon, upon, against τῇthe τῶνthe ἸουδαίωνJewish, Jews ἀποστάσειrevolt δεινήνterrible φησιto affirm, say κατειληφέναιto pull down, take hold, attain ταραχήνtrouble, tumult , πανταχόσεeverywhere τῶνthe ἀπὸfrom, away from τοῦthe ἔθνουςgentile, nation, people πρὸς+D=at; +A=to, toward, with τῶνthe κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along πόλινcity ἐνοίκωνinhabitant ὡςas ἂνwhatever, whoever, wherever πολεμίωνhostile, enemy of war ἀνηλεῶςmercilessly πορθουμένωνto plunder, destroy , ὥστεtherefore, so that, in order that ὁρᾶνto see τὰςthe πόλειςcity, town μεστὰςfull ἀτάφωνunburied σωμάτωνbody, corpse, carcase καὶand, also, even, then, next νεκροὺςmortal, dead ἅμαat once, together, both, early νηπίοιςbabies, infants γέρονταςold man ἐρριμμένουςto throw, cast γύναιάweak woman τεand, both, if μηδὲand not, but not; neither … nor τῆςthe ἐπ᾽on, upon, against αἰδῷshame μετειληφόταto receive a share , καὶand, also, even, then, next πᾶσανevery, all μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. τὴν‎the ἐπαρχίανprovince μεστὴνfull ἀδιηγήτωνindescribable συμφορῶνinjury, encounter , μείζοναgreater (in size, sound, age, strength, quality) δὲbut, and, however τῶνthe ἑκάστοτεalways τολμωμένωνto have courage τὴν‎the ἐπὶon, upon, against τοῖςthe ἀπειλουμένοιςto restrain ἀνάτασινextension . ταῦταthese (things) κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along λέξινspeech the; oh ἸώσηποςJosephus, Joseph . καὶand, also, even, then, next τὰthe μὲνon one hand, in one instance, etc. κατὰ+G=down from/upon; +A=according to, along ἸουδαίουςJews ἐνin, among, on, by, with, to τούτοιςthese ἦνto be . Josephus says that at that time a terrible commotion was stirred up throughout all Syria in consequence of the revolt of the Jews, and that everywhere the latter were destroyed without mercy, like enemies, by the inhabitants of the cities, so that one could see cities filled with unburied corpses, and the dead bodies of the aged scattered about with the bodies of infants, and women without even a covering for their nakedness, and the whole province full of indescribable calamities, while the dread of those things that were threatened was greater than the sufferings themselves which they anywhere endured. Such is the account of Josephus; and such was the condition of the Jews at that time.